* doc/lispref/frames.texi (Multiple Terminals): Document
[bpt/emacs.git] / doc / misc / cc-mode.texi
1 \input texinfo
2 @c Notes to self regarding line handling:
3 @c
4 @c Empty lines are often significant before @end directives; avoid them.
5 @c
6 @c Empty lines before and after @example directives are significant in
7 @c info output but not in TeX. Empty lines inside @example directives
8 @c are significant.
9
10 @c Conventions for formatting examples:
11 @c o If the example contains empty lines then put the surrounding empty
12 @c lines inside the @example directives. Put them outside otherwise.
13 @c o Use @group inside the example only if it shows indentation where
14 @c the relation between lines inside is relevant.
15 @c o Format line number columns like this:
16 @c 1: foo
17 @c 2: bar
18 @c ^ one space
19 @c ^^ two columns, right alignment
20 @c o Check line lengths in TeX output; they can typically be no longer
21 @c than 70 chars, 60 if the paragraph is indented.
22
23 @comment TBD: Document the finer details of statement anchoring?
24
25 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
26 @comment %**start of header (This is for running Texinfo on a region)
27 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
28
29
30 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
31 @comment How to make the various output formats:
32 @comment (Thanks to Robert Chassell for supplying this information.)
33 @comment Note that Texinfo 4.7 (or later) is needed.
34 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
35 @ignore
36 In each of the following pairs of commands, the first generates a
37 version with cross references pointing to the GNU Emacs manuals,
38 the second with them pointing to the XEmacs manuals.
39 ## Info output
40 makeinfo cc-mode.texi
41 makeinfo -DXEMACS cc-mode.texi
42
43 ## DVI output
44 ## You may need to set up the environment variable TEXINPUTS so
45 ## that tex can find the file texinfo.tex - See the tex
46 ## manpage.
47 texi2dvi cc-mode.texi
48 texi2dvi -t "@set XEMACS " cc-mode.texi
49
50 ## HTML output. (The --no-split parameter is optional)
51 makeinfo --html --no-split cc-mode.texi
52 makeinfo --html --no-split -DXEMACS cc-mode.texi
53
54 ## Plain text output
55 makeinfo --fill-column=70 --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 \
56 --no-headers --output=cc-mode.txt cc-mode.texi
57 makeinfo --fill-column=70 --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 \
58 --no-headers --output=cc-mode.txt -DXEMACS cc-mode.texi
59
60 ## DocBook output
61 makeinfo --docbook --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 \
62 cc-mode.texi
63 makeinfo --docbook --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 \
64 -DXEMACS cc-mode.texi
65
66 ## XML output
67 makeinfo --xml --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 \
68 cc-mode.texi
69 makeinfo --xml --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 \
70 -DXEMACS cc-mode.texi
71
72 #### (You must be in the same directory as the viewed file.)
73
74 ## View DVI output
75 xdvi cc-mode.dvi &
76
77 ## View HTML output
78 mozilla cc-mode.html
79 @end ignore
80
81 @comment No overfull hbox marks in the dvi file.
82 @finalout
83
84 @setfilename ../../info/ccmode
85 @settitle CC Mode Manual
86 @documentencoding UTF-8
87 @footnotestyle end
88
89 @c The following four macros generate the filenames and titles of the
90 @c main (X)Emacs manual and the Elisp/Lispref manual. Leave the
91 @c Texinfo variable `XEMACS' unset to generate a GNU Emacs version, set it
92 @c to generate an XEmacs version, e.g., with
93 @c "makeinfo -DXEMACS cc-mode.texi".
94 @ifset XEMACS
95 @macro emacsman
96 xemacs
97 @end macro
98 @macro emacsmantitle
99 XEmacs User's Manual
100 @end macro
101 @macro lispref
102 lispref
103 @end macro
104 @macro lispreftitle
105 XEmacs Lisp Reference Manual
106 @end macro
107 @end ifset
108
109 @ifclear XEMACS
110 @macro emacsman
111 emacs
112 @end macro
113 @macro emacsmantitle
114 GNU Emacs Manual
115 @end macro
116 @macro lispref
117 elisp
118 @end macro
119 @macro lispreftitle
120 GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual
121 @end macro
122 @end ifclear
123
124
125 @macro ccmode
126 CC Mode
127 @end macro
128
129 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
130 @comment @setchapternewpage odd !! we don't want blank pages !!
131 @comment %**end of header (This is for running Texinfo on a region)
132 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
133
134
135 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
136 @comment
137 @comment Texinfo manual for CC Mode
138 @comment Generated from the original README file by Krishna Padmasola
139 @comment <krishna@earth-gw.njit.edu>
140 @comment
141 @comment Authors:
142 @comment Barry A. Warsaw
143 @comment Martin Stjernholm
144 @comment Alan Mackenzie
145 @comment
146 @comment Maintained by Martin Stjernholm and Alan Mackenzie <bug-cc-mode@gnu.org>
147 @comment
148 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
149
150 @comment Define an index for syntactic symbols.
151 @defindex ss
152
153 @comment Combine key, syntactic symbol and concept indices into one.
154 @syncodeindex ss cp
155 @syncodeindex ky cp
156
157 @copying
158 This manual is for CC Mode in Emacs.
159
160 Copyright @copyright{} 1995--2014 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
161
162 @quotation
163 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
164 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3 or
165 any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no
166 Invariant Sections, with the Front-Cover texts being ``A GNU Manual'',
167 and with the Back-Cover Texts as in (a) below. A copy of the license
168 is included in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
169
170 (a) The FSF's Back-Cover Text is: ``You have the freedom to copy and
171 modify this GNU manual.''
172 @end quotation
173 @end copying
174
175 @comment Info directory entry for use by install-info. The indentation
176 @comment here is by request from the FSF folks.
177 @dircategory Emacs editing modes
178 @direntry
179 * CC Mode: (ccmode). Emacs mode for editing C, C++, Objective-C,
180 Java, Pike, AWK, and CORBA IDL code.
181 @end direntry
182
183 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
184 @comment TeX title page
185 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
186
187 @titlepage
188 @sp 10
189
190 @center @titlefont{CC Mode 5.32}
191 @sp 2
192 @center A GNU Emacs mode for editing C and C-like languages
193 @sp 2
194 @center Barry A. Warsaw, Martin Stjernholm, Alan Mackenzie
195
196 @page
197 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
198 @insertcopying
199
200 This manual was generated from cc-mode.texi, which is distributed with Emacs,
201 or can be downloaded from @url{http://savannah.gnu.org/projects/emacs/}.
202 @end titlepage
203
204 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
205 @comment The Top node contains the master menu for the Info file.
206 @comment This appears only in the Info file, not the printed manual.
207 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
208
209 @summarycontents
210 @contents
211
212 @node Top, Introduction, (dir), (dir)
213 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
214
215 @ifnottex
216 @top @ccmode{}
217
218 @ccmode{} is a GNU Emacs mode for editing files containing C, C++,
219 Objective-C, Java, CORBA IDL (and the variants PSDL and CIDL), Pike
220 and AWK code. It provides syntax-based indentation, font locking, and
221 has several handy commands and some minor modes to make the editing
222 easier. It does not provide tools to look up and navigate between
223 functions, classes, etc.; there are other packages for that.
224
225 @insertcopying
226 @end ifnottex
227
228 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
229 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
230
231 @menu
232 * Introduction::
233 * Overview::
234 * Getting Started::
235 * Commands::
236 * Font Locking::
237 * Config Basics::
238 * Custom Filling and Breaking::
239 * Custom Auto-newlines::
240 * Clean-ups::
241 * Indentation Engine Basics::
242 * Customizing Indentation::
243 * Custom Macros::
244 * Odds and Ends::
245 * Sample Init File::
246 * Performance Issues::
247 * Limitations and Known Bugs::
248 * FAQ::
249 * Updating CC Mode::
250 * Mailing Lists and Bug Reports::
251 * GNU Free Documentation License::
252 * Command and Function Index::
253 * Variable Index::
254 * Concept and Key Index::
255
256 @detailmenu
257 --- The Detailed Node Listing ---
258
259 Commands
260
261 * Indentation Commands::
262 * Comment Commands::
263 * Movement Commands::
264 * Filling and Breaking::
265 * Minor Modes::
266 * Electric Keys::
267 * Auto-newlines::
268 * Hungry WS Deletion::
269 * Subword Movement::
270 * Other Commands::
271
272 Font Locking
273
274 * Font Locking Preliminaries::
275 * Faces::
276 * Doc Comments::
277 * AWK Mode Font Locking::
278
279 Configuration Basics
280
281 * CC Hooks::
282 * Style Variables::
283 * Styles::
284
285 Styles
286
287 * Built-in Styles::
288 * Choosing a Style::
289 * Adding Styles::
290 * Guessing the Style::
291 * File Styles::
292
293 Customizing Auto-newlines
294
295 * Hanging Braces::
296 * Hanging Colons::
297 * Hanging Semicolons and Commas::
298
299 Hanging Braces
300
301 * Custom Braces::
302
303 Indentation Engine Basics
304
305 * Syntactic Analysis::
306 * Syntactic Symbols::
307 * Indentation Calculation::
308
309 Syntactic Symbols
310
311 * Function Symbols::
312 * Class Symbols::
313 * Conditional Construct Symbols::
314 * Switch Statement Symbols::
315 * Brace List Symbols::
316 * External Scope Symbols::
317 * Paren List Symbols::
318 * Literal Symbols::
319 * Multiline Macro Symbols::
320 * Objective-C Method Symbols::
321 * Java Symbols::
322 * Statement Block Symbols::
323 * K&R Symbols::
324
325 Customizing Indentation
326
327 * c-offsets-alist::
328 * Interactive Customization::
329 * Line-Up Functions::
330 * Custom Line-Up::
331 * Other Indentation::
332
333 Line-Up Functions
334
335 * Brace/Paren Line-Up::
336 * List Line-Up::
337 * Operator Line-Up::
338 * Comment Line-Up::
339 * Misc Line-Up::
340
341 Customizing Macros
342
343 * Macro Backslashes::
344 * Macros with ;::
345
346 @end detailmenu
347 @end menu
348
349 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
350 @node Introduction, Overview, Top, Top
351 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
352 @chapter Introduction
353 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
354
355 @cindex BOCM
356 @cindex history
357 @cindex awk-mode.el
358 @cindex c-mode.el
359 @cindex c++-mode.el
360
361 Welcome to @ccmode{}, a GNU Emacs mode for editing files containing C,
362 C++, Objective-C, Java, CORBA IDL (and the variants CORBA PSDL and
363 CIDL), Pike and AWK code. This incarnation of the mode is descended
364 from @file{c-mode.el} (also called ``Boring Old C Mode'' or BOCM
365 @t{:-)}, @file{c++-mode.el} version 2, which Barry Warsaw had been
366 maintaining since 1992, and @file{awk-mode.el}, a long neglected mode
367 in the (X)Emacs base.
368
369 Late in 1997, Martin Stjernholm joined Barry on the @ccmode{}
370 Maintainers Team, and implemented the Pike support. In 2000 Martin
371 took over as the sole maintainer. In 2001 Alan Mackenzie joined the
372 team, implementing AWK support in version 5.30. @ccmode{} did not
373 originally contain the font lock support for its languages; that
374 was added in version 5.30.
375
376 This manual describes @ccmode{}
377 @comment The following line must appear on its own, so that the
378 version 5.32.
379 @comment Release.py script can update the version number automatically
380
381 @ccmode{} supports the editing of K&R and ANSI C, C++, Objective-C,
382 Java, CORBA's Interface Definition Language, Pike@footnote{A C-like
383 scripting language with its roots in the LPC language used in some MUD
384 engines. See @uref{http://pike.ida.liu.se/}.} and AWK files. In this
385 way, you can easily set up consistent font locking and coding styles for
386 use in editing all of these languages, although AWK is not yet as
387 uniformly integrated as the other languages.
388
389 @findex c-mode
390 @findex c++-mode
391 @findex objc-mode
392 @findex java-mode
393 @findex idl-mode
394 @findex pike-mode
395 @findex awk-mode
396 Note that the name of this package is ``@ccmode{}'', but there is no top
397 level @code{cc-mode} entry point. All of the variables, commands, and
398 functions in @ccmode{} are prefixed with @code{c-@var{thing}}, and
399 @code{c-mode}, @code{c++-mode}, @code{objc-mode}, @code{java-mode},
400 @code{idl-mode}, @code{pike-mode}, and @code{awk-mode} entry points are
401 provided. This package is intended to be a replacement for
402 @file{c-mode.el}, @file{c++-mode.el} and @file{awk-mode.el}.
403
404 A special word of thanks goes to Krishna Padmasola for his work in
405 converting the original @file{README} file to Texinfo format. I'd
406 also like to thank all the @ccmode{} victims who help enormously
407 during the early beta stages of @ccmode{}'s development.
408
409 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
410 @node Overview, Getting Started, Introduction, Top
411 @comment node-name, next, previous, up@cindex organization of the manual
412 @chapter Overview of the Manual
413 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
414
415 @noindent
416 The manual starts with several introductory chapters (including this
417 one).
418
419 @noindent
420 The next chunk of the manual describes the day to day @emph{use} of
421 @ccmode{} (as contrasted with how to customize it).
422
423 @itemize @bullet
424 @item
425 The chapter ``Commands'' describes in detail how to use (nearly) all
426 of @ccmode{}'s features. There are extensive cross-references from
427 here to the corresponding sections later in the manual which tell you
428 how to customize these features.
429
430 @item
431 ``Font Locking'' describes how ``syntax highlighting'' is applied to
432 your buffers. It is mainly background information and can be skipped
433 over at a first reading.
434 @end itemize
435
436 @noindent
437 The next chunk of the manual describes how to @emph{customize}
438 @ccmode{}. Typically, an overview of a topic is given at the chapter
439 level, then the sections and subsections describe the material in
440 increasing detail.
441
442 @itemize @bullet
443 @item
444 The chapter ``Configuration Basics'' tells you @emph{how} to write
445 customizations: whether in hooks, in styles, in both, or in neither,
446 depending on your needs. It describes the @ccmode{} style system and
447 lists the standard styles that @ccmode{} supplies.
448
449 @item
450 The next few chapters describe in detail how to customize the various
451 features of @ccmode{}.
452
453 @item
454 Finally, there is a sample @file{.emacs} fragment, which might help you
455 in creating your own customization.
456 @end itemize
457
458 @noindent
459 The manual ends with ``this and that'', things that don't fit cleanly
460 into any of the previous chunks.
461
462 @itemize @bullet
463 @item
464 Two chapters discuss the performance of @ccmode{} and known
465 bugs/limitations.
466
467 @item
468 The FAQ contains a list of common problems and questions.
469
470 @item
471 The next two chapters tell you how to get in touch with the @ccmode{}
472 project: whether for updating @ccmode{} or submitting bug reports.
473 @end itemize
474
475 @noindent
476 Finally, there are the customary indices.
477
478 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
479 @node Getting Started, Commands, Overview, Top
480 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
481 @chapter Getting Started
482 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
483
484 If you got this version of @ccmode{} with Emacs or XEmacs, it should
485 work just fine right out of the box. Note however that you might not
486 have the latest @ccmode{} release and might want to upgrade your copy
487 (see below).
488
489 You should probably start by skimming through the entire Commands chapter
490 (@pxref{Commands}) to get an overview of @ccmode{}'s capabilities.
491
492 After trying out some commands, you may dislike some aspects of
493 @ccmode{}'s default configuration. Here is an outline of how to
494 change some of the settings that newcomers to @ccmode{} most often
495 want to change:
496
497 @table @asis
498 @item c-basic-offset
499 This Lisp variable holds an integer, the number of columns @ccmode{}
500 indents nested code. To set this value to 6, customize
501 @code{c-basic-offset} or put this into your @file{.emacs}:
502
503 @example
504 (setq c-basic-offset 6)
505 @end example
506
507 @item The (indentation) style
508 The basic ``shape'' of indentation created by @ccmode{}---by default,
509 this is @code{gnu} style (except for Java and AWK buffers). A list of
510 the available styles and their descriptions can be found in
511 @ref{Built-in Styles}. A complete specification of the @ccmode{}
512 style system, including how to create your own style, can be found in
513 the chapter @ref{Styles}. To set your style to @code{linux}, either
514 customize @code{c-default-style} or put this into your @file{.emacs}:
515
516 @example
517 (setq c-default-style '((java-mode . "java")
518 (awk-mode . "awk")
519 (other . "linux")))
520 @end example
521
522 @item Electric Indentation
523 Normally, when you type ``punctuation'' characters such as @samp{;} or
524 @samp{@{}, @ccmode{} instantly reindents the current line. This can
525 be disconcerting until you get used to it. To disable @dfn{electric
526 indentation} in the current buffer, type @kbd{C-c C-l}. Type the same
527 thing to enable it again. To have electric indentation disabled by
528 default, put the following into your @file{.emacs} file@footnote{There
529 is no ``easy customization'' facility for making this change.}:
530
531 @example
532 (setq-default c-electric-flag nil)
533 @end example
534
535 @noindent
536 Details of this and other similar ``Minor Modes'' appear in the
537 section @ref{Minor Modes}.
538
539 @item Making the @key{RET} key indent the new line
540 The standard Emacs binding for @key{RET} just adds a new line. If you
541 want it to reindent the new line as well, rebind the key. Note that
542 the action of rebinding would fail if the pertinent keymap didn't yet
543 exist---we thus need to delay the action until after @ccmode{} has
544 been loaded. Put the following code into your @file{.emacs}:
545
546 @example
547 (defun my-make-CR-do-indent ()
548 (define-key c-mode-base-map "\C-m" 'c-context-line-break))
549 (add-hook 'c-initialization-hook 'my-make-CR-do-indent)
550 @end example
551
552 @noindent
553 This example demonstrates the use of a very powerful @ccmode{} (and
554 Emacs) facility, the hook. The use of @ccmode{}'s hooks is described
555 in @ref{CC Hooks}.
556 @end table
557
558 All these settings should occur in your @file{.emacs} @emph{before}
559 any @ccmode{} buffers get loaded---in particular, before any call of
560 @code{desktop-read}.
561
562 As you get to know the mode better, you may want to make more
563 ambitious changes to your configuration. For this, you should start
564 reading the chapter @ref{Config Basics}.
565
566 If you are upgrading an existing @ccmode{} installation, please see
567 the @file{README} file for installation details. In particular, if
568 you are going to be editing AWK files, @file{README} describes how to
569 configure your (X)Emacs so that @ccmode{} will supersede the obsolete
570 @code{awk-mode.el} which might have been supplied with your (X)Emacs.
571 @ccmode{} might not work with older versions of Emacs or XEmacs. See
572 the @ccmode{} release notes at @uref{http://cc-mode.sourceforge.net}
573 for the latest information on Emacs version and package compatibility
574 (@pxref{Updating CC Mode}).
575
576 @deffn Command c-version
577 @findex version (c-)
578 You can find out what version of @ccmode{} you are using by visiting a C
579 file and entering @kbd{M-x c-version RET}. You should see this message in
580 the echo area:
581
582 @example
583 Using CC Mode version 5.XX
584 @end example
585
586 @noindent
587 where @samp{XX} is the minor release number.
588 @end deffn
589
590 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
591 @node Commands, Font Locking, Getting Started, Top
592 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
593 @chapter Commands
594 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
595
596 This chapter specifies all of CC Mode's commands, and thus contains
597 nearly everything you need to know to @emph{use} @ccmode{} (as
598 contrasted with configuring it). @dfn{Commands} here means both
599 control key sequences and @dfn{electric keys}, these being characters
600 such as @samp{;} which, as well as inserting themselves into the
601 buffer, also do other things.
602
603 You might well want to review
604 @ifset XEMACS
605 @ref{Lists,,,@emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}},
606 @end ifset
607 @ifclear XEMACS
608 @ref{Moving by Parens,,,@emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}},
609 @end ifclear
610 which describes commands for moving around brace and parenthesis
611 structures.
612
613
614 @menu
615 * Indentation Commands::
616 * Comment Commands::
617 * Movement Commands::
618 * Filling and Breaking::
619 * Minor Modes::
620 * Electric Keys::
621 * Auto-newlines::
622 * Hungry WS Deletion::
623 * Subword Movement::
624 * Other Commands::
625 @end menu
626
627 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
628 @node Indentation Commands, Comment Commands, Commands, Commands
629 @comment node-name, next, previous,up
630 @section Indentation Commands
631 @cindex indentation
632 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
633
634 The following commands reindent C constructs. Note that when you
635 change your coding style, either interactively or through some other
636 means, your file does @emph{not} automatically get reindented. You
637 will need to execute one of the following commands to see the effects
638 of your changes.
639
640 @cindex GNU indent program
641 Also, variables like @code{c-hanging-*} and @code{c-cleanup-list}
642 (@pxref{Custom Auto-newlines}) only affect how on-the-fly code is
643 formatted. Changing the ``hanginess'' of a brace and then
644 reindenting, will not move the brace to a different line. For this,
645 you're better off getting an external program like GNU @code{indent},
646 which will rearrange brace location, amongst other things.
647
648 Preprocessor directives are handled as syntactic whitespace from other
649 code, i.e., they can be interspersed anywhere without affecting the
650 indentation of the surrounding code, just like comments.
651
652 The code inside macro definitions is, by default, still analyzed
653 syntactically so that you get relative indentation there just as you'd
654 get if the same code was outside a macro. However, since there is no
655 hint about the syntactic context, i.e., whether the macro expands to an
656 expression, to some statements, or perhaps to whole functions, the
657 syntactic recognition can be wrong. @ccmode{} manages to figure it
658 out correctly most of the time, though.
659
660 Some macros, when invoked, ''have their own semicolon''. To get the
661 next line indented correctly, rather than as a continuation line,
662 @xref{Macros with ;}.
663
664 Reindenting large sections of code can take a long time. When
665 @ccmode{} reindents a region of code, it is essentially equivalent to
666 hitting @key{TAB} on every line of the region.
667
668 These commands indent code:
669
670 @table @asis
671 @item @kbd{@key{TAB}} (@code{c-indent-command})
672 @kindex TAB
673 @findex c-indent-command
674 @findex indent-command (c-)
675 This command indents the current line. That is all you need to know
676 about it for normal use.
677
678 @code{c-indent-command} does different things, depending on the
679 setting of @code{c-syntactic-indentation} (@pxref{Indentation Engine
680 Basics}):
681
682 @itemize @bullet
683 @item
684 When it's non-@code{nil} (which it normally is), the command indents
685 the line according to its syntactic context. With a prefix argument
686 (@kbd{C-u @key{TAB}}), it will re-indent the entire
687 expression@footnote{this is only useful for a line starting with a
688 comment opener or an opening brace, parenthesis, or string quote.}
689 that begins at the line's left margin.
690
691 @item
692 When it's @code{nil}, the command indents the line by an extra
693 @code{c-basic-offset} columns. A prefix argument acts as a
694 multiplier. A bare prefix (@kbd{C-u @key{TAB}}) is equivalent to -1,
695 removing @code{c-basic-offset} columns from the indentation.
696 @end itemize
697
698 The precise behavior is modified by several variables: With
699 @code{c-tab-always-indent}, you can make @key{TAB} insert whitespace
700 in some circumstances---@code{c-insert-tab-function} then defines
701 precisely what sort of ``whitespace'' this will be. Set the standard
702 Emacs variable @code{indent-tabs-mode} to @code{t} if you want real
703 @samp{tab} characters to be used in the indentation, to @code{nil} if
704 you want only spaces. @xref{Just Spaces,,,@emacsman{},
705 @emacsmantitle{}}.
706
707 @defopt c-tab-always-indent
708 @vindex tab-always-indent (c-)
709 @cindex literal
710 This variable modifies how @key{TAB} operates.
711 @itemize @bullet
712 @item
713 When it is @code{t} (the default), @key{TAB} simply indents the
714 current line.
715 @item
716 When it is @code{nil}, @key{TAB} (re)indents the line only if point is
717 to the left of the first non-whitespace character on the line.
718 Otherwise it inserts some whitespace (a tab or an equivalent number of
719 spaces; see below) at point.
720 @item
721 With some other value, the line is reindented. Additionally, if point
722 is within a string or comment, some whitespace is inserted.
723 @end itemize
724 @end defopt
725
726 @defopt c-insert-tab-function
727 @vindex insert-tab-function (c-)
728 @findex tab-to-tab-stop
729 When ``some whitespace'' is inserted as described above, what actually
730 happens is that the function stored in @code{c-insert-tab-function} is
731 called. Normally, this is @code{insert-tab}, which inserts a real tab
732 character or the equivalent number of spaces (depending on
733 @code{indent-tabs-mode}). Some people, however, set
734 @code{c-insert-tab-function} to @code{tab-to-tab-stop} so as to get
735 hard tab stops when indenting.
736 @end defopt
737 @end table
738
739 @noindent
740 The kind of indentation the next five commands do depends on the
741 setting of @code{c-syntactic-indentation} (@pxref{Indentation Engine
742 Basics}):
743 @itemize @bullet
744 @item
745 when it is non-@code{nil} (the default), the commands indent lines
746 according to their syntactic context;
747 @item
748 when it is @code{nil}, they just indent each line the same amount as
749 the previous non-blank line. The commands that indent a region aren't
750 very useful in this case.
751 @end itemize
752
753 @table @asis
754 @item @kbd{C-j} (@code{newline-and-indent})
755 @kindex C-j
756 @findex newline-and-indent
757 Inserts a newline and indents the new blank line, ready to start
758 typing. This is a standard (X)Emacs command.
759
760 @item @kbd{C-M-q} (@code{c-indent-exp})
761 @kindex C-M-q
762 @findex c-indent-exp
763 @findex indent-exp (c-)
764 Indents an entire balanced brace or parenthesis expression. Note that
765 point must be on the opening brace or parenthesis of the expression
766 you want to indent.
767
768 @item @kbd{C-c C-q} (@code{c-indent-defun})
769 @kindex C-c C-q
770 @findex c-indent-defun
771 @findex indent-defun (c-)
772 Indents the entire top-level function, class or macro definition
773 encompassing point. It leaves point unchanged. This function can't be
774 used to reindent a nested brace construct, such as a nested class or
775 function, or a Java method. The top-level construct being reindented
776 must be complete, i.e., it must have both a beginning brace and an ending
777 brace.
778
779 @item @kbd{C-M-\} (@code{indent-region})
780 @kindex C-M-\
781 @findex indent-region
782 Indents an arbitrary region of code. This is a standard Emacs command,
783 tailored for C code in a @ccmode{} buffer. Note, of course, that point
784 and mark must delineate the region you want to indent.
785
786 @item @kbd{C-M-h} (@code{c-mark-function})
787 @kindex C-M-h
788 @findex c-mark-function
789 @findex mark-function (c-)
790 While not strictly an indentation command, this is useful for marking
791 the current top-level function or class definition as the current
792 region. As with @code{c-indent-defun}, this command operates on
793 top-level constructs, and can't be used to mark say, a Java method.
794 @end table
795
796 These variables are also useful when indenting code:
797
798 @defopt indent-tabs-mode
799 This is a standard Emacs variable that controls how line indentation
800 is composed. When it's non-@code{nil}, tabs can be used in a line's
801 indentation, otherwise only spaces are used.
802 @end defopt
803
804 @defopt c-progress-interval
805 @vindex progress-interval (c-)
806 When indenting large regions of code, this variable controls how often a
807 progress message is displayed. Set this variable to @code{nil} to
808 inhibit the progress messages, or set it to an integer which is how
809 often (in seconds) progress messages are to be displayed.
810 @end defopt
811
812 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
813 @node Comment Commands, Movement Commands, Indentation Commands, Commands
814 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
815 @section Comment Commands
816 @cindex comments (insertion of)
817 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
818
819 @table @asis
820 @item @kbd{C-c C-c} (@code{comment-region})
821 @kindex C-c C-c
822 @findex comment-region
823 This command comments out the lines that start in the region. With a
824 negative argument, it does the opposite: it deletes the comment
825 delimiters from these lines. @xref{Multi-Line Comments,,, emacs, GNU
826 Emacs Manual}, for fuller details. @code{comment-region} isn't
827 actually part of @ccmode{}; it is given a @ccmode{} binding for
828 convenience.
829
830 @item @kbd{M-;} (@code{comment-dwim} or @code{indent-for-comment} @footnote{The name of this command varies between (X)Emacs versions.})
831 @kindex M-;
832 @findex comment-dwim
833 @findex indent-for-comment
834 Insert a comment at the end of the current line, if none is there
835 already. Then reindent the comment according to @code{comment-column}
836 @ifclear XEMACS
837 (@pxref{Options for Comments,,, emacs, GNU Emacs Manual})
838 @end ifclear
839 @ifset XEMACS
840 (@pxref{Comments,,, xemacs, XEmacs User's Manual})
841 @end ifset
842 and the variables below. Finally, position the point after the
843 comment starter. @kbd{C-u M-;} kills any comment on the current line,
844 together with any whitespace before it. This is a standard Emacs
845 command, but @ccmode{} enhances it a bit with two variables:
846
847 @defopt c-indent-comment-alist
848 @vindex indent-comment-alist (c-)
849 @vindex comment-column
850 This style variable allows you to vary the column that @kbd{M-;} puts
851 the comment at, depending on what sort of code is on the line, and
852 possibly the indentation of any similar comment on the preceding line.
853 It is an association list that maps different types of lines to
854 actions describing how they should be handled. If a certain line type
855 isn't present on the list then the line is indented to the column
856 specified by @code{comment-column}.
857
858 See the documentation string for a full description of this
859 variable (use @kbd{C-h v c-indent-comment-alist}).
860 @end defopt
861
862 @defopt c-indent-comments-syntactically-p
863 @vindex indent-comments-syntactically-p (c-)
864 Normally, when this style variable is @code{nil}, @kbd{M-;} will
865 indent comment-only lines according to @code{c-indent-comment-alist},
866 just as it does with lines where other code precede the comments.
867 However, if you want it to act just like @key{TAB} for comment-only
868 lines you can get that by setting
869 @code{c-indent-comments-syntactically-p} to non-@code{nil}.
870
871 If @code{c-indent-comments-syntactically-p} is non-@code{nil} then
872 @code{c-indent-comment-alist} won't be consulted at all for comment-only
873 lines.
874 @end defopt
875 @end table
876
877 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
878 @node Movement Commands, Filling and Breaking, Comment Commands, Commands
879 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
880 @section Movement Commands
881 @cindex movement
882 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
883
884 @ccmode{} contains some useful commands for moving around in C code.
885
886 @table @asis
887 @item @kbd{C-M-a} (@code{c-beginning-of-defun})
888 @itemx @kbd{C-M-e} (@code{c-end-of-defun})
889 @findex c-beginning-of-defun
890 @findex c-end-of-defun
891 @vindex c-defun-tactic
892 @vindex defun-tactic (c-)
893
894 Move to the beginning or end of the current or next function. Other
895 constructs (such as a structs or classes) which have a brace block
896 also count as ``functions'' here. To move over several functions, you
897 can give these commands a repeat count.
898
899 The start of a function is at its header. The end of the function is
900 after its closing brace, or after the semicolon of a construct (such
901 as a @code{struct}) which doesn't end at the brace. These two
902 commands try to leave point at the beginning of a line near the actual
903 start or end of the function. This occasionally causes point not to
904 move at all.
905
906 By default, these commands will recognize functions contained within a
907 @dfn{declaration scope} such as a C++ @code{class} or @code{namespace}
908 construct, should the point start inside it. If @ccmode fails to find
909 function beginnings or ends inside the current declaration scope, it
910 will search the enclosing scopes. If you want @ccmode to recognize
911 functions only at the top level@footnote{this was @ccmode{}'s
912 behavior prior to version 5.32.}, set @code{c-defun-tactic} to
913 @code{t}.
914
915 These functions are analogous to the Emacs built-in commands
916 @code{beginning-of-defun} and @code{end-of-defun}, except they
917 eliminate the constraint that the top-level opening brace of the defun
918 must be in column zero. See @ref{Defuns,,,@emacsman{},
919 @emacsmantitle{}}, for more information.
920
921 @item @kbd{C-M-a} (AWK Mode) (@code{c-awk-beginning-of-defun})
922 @itemx @kbd{C-M-e} (AWK Mode) (@code{c-awk-end-of-defun})
923 @kindex C-M-a (AWK Mode)
924 @kindex C-M-e (AWK Mode)
925 @findex c-awk-beginning-of-defun
926 @findex awk-beginning-of-defun (c-)
927 @findex c-awk-end-of-defun
928 @findex awk-end-of-defun (c-)
929 Move to the beginning or end of the current or next AWK defun. These
930 commands can take prefix-arguments, their functionality being entirely
931 equivalent to @code{beginning-of-defun} and @code{end-of-defun}.
932
933 AWK Mode @dfn{defuns} are either pattern/action pairs (either of which
934 might be implicit) or user defined functions. Having the @samp{@{} and
935 @samp{@}} (if there are any) in column zero, as is suggested for some
936 modes, is neither necessary nor helpful in AWK mode.
937
938 @item @kbd{M-a} (@code{c-beginning-of-statement})
939 @itemx @kbd{M-e} (@code{c-end-of-statement})
940 @kindex M-a
941 @kindex M-e
942 @findex c-beginning-of-statement
943 @findex c-end-of-statement
944 @findex beginning-of-statement (c-)
945 @findex end-of-statement (c-)
946 Move to the beginning or end of the innermost C statement. If point
947 is already there, move to the next beginning or end of a statement,
948 even if that means moving into a block. (Use @kbd{C-M-b} or
949 @kbd{C-M-f} to move over a balanced block.) A prefix argument @var{n}
950 means move over @var{n} statements.
951
952 If point is within or next to a comment or a string which spans more
953 than one line, these commands move by sentences instead of statements.
954
955 When called from a program, these functions take three optional
956 arguments: the repetition count, a buffer position limit which is the
957 farthest back to search for the syntactic context, and a flag saying
958 whether to do sentence motion in or near comments and multiline
959 strings.
960
961 @item @kbd{C-c C-u} (@code{c-up-conditional})
962 @kindex C-c C-u
963 @findex c-up-conditional
964 @findex up-conditional (c-)
965 Move back to the containing preprocessor conditional, leaving the mark
966 behind. A prefix argument acts as a repeat count. With a negative
967 argument, move forward to the end of the containing preprocessor
968 conditional.
969
970 @samp{#elif} is treated like @samp{#else} followed by @samp{#if}, so the
971 function stops at them when going backward, but not when going
972 forward.
973
974 This key sequence is not bound in AWK Mode, which doesn't have
975 preprocessor statements.
976
977 @item @kbd{M-x c-up-conditional-with-else}
978 @findex c-up-conditional-with-else
979 @findex up-conditional-with-else (c-)
980 A variety of @code{c-up-conditional} that also stops at @samp{#else}
981 lines. Normally those lines are ignored.
982
983 @item @kbd{M-x c-down-conditional}
984 @findex c-down-conditional
985 @findex down-conditional (c-)
986 Move forward into the next nested preprocessor conditional, leaving
987 the mark behind. A prefix argument acts as a repeat count. With a
988 negative argument, move backward into the previous nested preprocessor
989 conditional.
990
991 @samp{#elif} is treated like @samp{#else} followed by @samp{#if}, so the
992 function stops at them when going forward, but not when going backward.
993
994 @item @kbd{M-x c-down-conditional-with-else}
995 @findex c-down-conditional-with-else
996 @findex down-conditional-with-else (c-)
997 A variety of @code{c-down-conditional} that also stops at @samp{#else}
998 lines. Normally those lines are ignored.
999
1000 @item @kbd{C-c C-p} (@code{c-backward-conditional})
1001 @itemx @kbd{C-c C-n} (@code{c-forward-conditional})
1002 @kindex C-c C-p
1003 @kindex C-c C-n
1004 @findex c-backward-conditional
1005 @findex c-forward-conditional
1006 @findex backward-conditional (c-)
1007 @findex forward-conditional (c-)
1008 Move backward or forward across a preprocessor conditional, leaving
1009 the mark behind. A prefix argument acts as a repeat count. With a
1010 negative argument, move in the opposite direction.
1011
1012 These key sequences are not bound in AWK Mode, which doesn't have
1013 preprocessor statements.
1014
1015 @item @kbd{M-x c-backward-into-nomenclature}
1016 @itemx @kbd{M-x c-forward-into-nomenclature}
1017 @findex c-backward-into-nomenclature
1018 @findex c-forward-into-nomenclature
1019 @findex backward-into-nomenclature (c-)
1020 @findex forward-into-nomenclature (c-)
1021 A popular programming style, especially for object-oriented languages
1022 such as C++ is to write symbols in a mixed case format, where the
1023 first letter of each word is capitalized, and not separated by
1024 underscores. E.g., @samp{SymbolsWithMixedCaseAndNoUnderlines}.
1025
1026 These commands move backward or forward to the beginning of the next
1027 capitalized word. With prefix argument @var{n}, move @var{n} times.
1028 If @var{n} is negative, move in the opposite direction.
1029
1030 Note that these two commands have been superseded by
1031 @code{subword-mode}, which you should use instead. @xref{Subword
1032 Movement}. They might be removed from a future release of @ccmode{}.
1033 @end table
1034
1035 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1036 @node Filling and Breaking, Minor Modes, Movement Commands, Commands
1037 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1038 @section Filling and Line Breaking Commands
1039 @cindex text filling
1040 @cindex line breaking
1041 @cindex comment handling
1042 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1043
1044 Since there's a lot of normal text in comments and string literals,
1045 @ccmode{} provides features to edit these like in text mode. The goal
1046 is to do it seamlessly, i.e., you can use auto fill mode, sentence and
1047 paragraph movement, paragraph filling, adaptive filling etc. wherever
1048 there's a piece of normal text without having to think much about it.
1049 @ccmode{} keeps the indentation, fixes suitable comment line prefixes,
1050 and so on.
1051
1052 You can configure the exact way comments get filled and broken, and
1053 where Emacs does auto-filling (see @pxref{Custom Filling and
1054 Breaking}). Typically, the style system (@pxref{Styles}) will have
1055 set this up for you, so you probably won't have to bother.
1056
1057 @findex auto-fill-mode
1058 @cindex Auto Fill mode
1059 @cindex paragraph filling
1060 Line breaks are by default handled (almost) the same regardless of
1061 whether they are made by auto fill mode (@pxref{Auto
1062 Fill,,,@emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}}), by paragraph filling (e.g., with
1063 @kbd{M-q}), or explicitly with @kbd{M-j} or similar methods. In
1064 string literals, the new line gets the same indentation as the
1065 previous nonempty line.@footnote{You can change this default by
1066 setting the @code{string} syntactic symbol (@pxref{Syntactic Symbols}
1067 and @pxref{Customizing Indentation})}.
1068
1069 @table @asis
1070 @item @kbd{M-q} (@code{c-fill-paragraph})
1071 @kindex M-q
1072 @findex c-fill-paragraph
1073 @findex fill-paragraph (c-)
1074 @cindex Javadoc markup
1075 @cindex Pike autodoc markup
1076 This command fills multiline string literals and both block
1077 and line style comments. In Java buffers, the Javadoc markup words
1078 are recognized as paragraph starters. The line oriented Pike autodoc
1079 markup words are recognized in the same way in Pike mode.
1080
1081 The formatting of the starters (@code{/*}) and enders (@code{*/}) of
1082 block comments are kept as they were before the filling. I.e., if
1083 either the starter or ender were on a line of its own, then it stays
1084 on its own line; conversely, if the delimiter has comment text on its
1085 line, it keeps at least one word of that text with it on the line.
1086
1087 This command is the replacement for @code{fill-paragraph} in @ccmode{}
1088 buffers.
1089
1090 @item @kbd{M-j} (@code{c-indent-new-comment-line})
1091 @kindex M-j
1092 @findex c-indent-new-comment-line
1093 @findex indent-new-comment-line (c-)
1094 This breaks the current line at point and indents the new line. If
1095 point was in a comment, the new line gets the proper comment line
1096 prefix. If point was inside a macro, a backslash is inserted before
1097 the line break. It is the replacement for
1098 @code{indent-new-comment-line}.
1099
1100 @item @kbd{M-x c-context-line-break}
1101 @findex c-context-line-break
1102 @findex context-line-break (c-)
1103 Insert a line break suitable to the context: If the point is inside a
1104 comment, the new line gets the suitable indentation and comment line
1105 prefix like @code{c-indent-new-comment-line}. In normal code it's
1106 indented like @code{newline-and-indent} would do. In macros it acts
1107 like @code{newline-and-indent} but additionally inserts and optionally
1108 aligns the line ending backslash so that the macro remains unbroken.
1109 @xref{Custom Macros}, for details about the backslash alignment. In a
1110 string, a backslash is inserted only if the string is within a
1111 macro@footnote{In GCC, unescaped line breaks within strings are
1112 valid.}.
1113
1114 This function is not bound to a key by default, but it's intended to be
1115 used on the @kbd{RET} key. If you like the behavior of
1116 @code{newline-and-indent} on @kbd{RET}, you should consider switching to
1117 this function. @xref{Sample Init File}.
1118
1119 @item @kbd{M-x c-context-open-line}
1120 @findex c-context-open-line
1121 @findex context-open-line (c-)
1122 This is to @kbd{C-o} (@kbd{M-x open-line}) as
1123 @code{c-context-line-break} is to @kbd{RET}. I.e., it works just like
1124 @code{c-context-line-break} but leaves the point before the inserted
1125 line break.
1126 @end table
1127
1128
1129 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1130 @node Minor Modes, Electric Keys, Filling and Breaking, Commands
1131 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1132 @section Minor Modes
1133 @cindex Minor Modes
1134 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1135
1136 @ccmode{} contains several minor-mode-like features that you might
1137 find useful while writing new code or editing old code:
1138
1139 @table @asis
1140 @item electric mode
1141 When this is enabled, certain visible characters cause reformatting as
1142 they are typed. This is normally helpful, but can be a nuisance when
1143 editing chaotically formatted code. It can also be disconcerting,
1144 especially for users who are new to @ccmode{}.
1145 @item auto-newline mode
1146 This automatically inserts newlines where you'd probably want to type
1147 them yourself, e.g., after typing @samp{@}}s. Its action is suppressed
1148 when electric mode is disabled.
1149 @item hungry-delete mode
1150 This lets you delete a contiguous block of whitespace with a single
1151 key: for example, the newline and indentation just inserted by
1152 auto-newline when you want to back up and write a comment after the
1153 last statement.
1154 @item subword mode
1155 This mode makes basic word movement commands like @kbd{M-f}
1156 (@code{forward-word}) and @kbd{M-b} (@code{backward-word}) treat the
1157 parts of sillycapsed symbols as different words.
1158 E.g., @samp{NSGraphicsContext} is treated as three words @samp{NS},
1159 @samp{Graphics}, and @samp{Context}.
1160 @item syntactic-indentation mode
1161 When this is enabled (which it normally is), indentation commands such
1162 as @kbd{C-j} indent lines of code according to their syntactic
1163 structure. Otherwise, a line is simply indented to the same level as
1164 the previous one and @kbd{@key{TAB}} adjusts the indentation in steps
1165 of `c-basic-offset'.
1166 @end table
1167
1168 Full details on how these minor modes work are at @ref{Electric Keys},
1169 @ref{Auto-newlines}, @ref{Hungry WS Deletion}, @ref{Subword Movement},
1170 and @ref{Indentation Engine Basics}.
1171
1172 You can toggle each of these minor modes on and off, and you can
1173 configure @ccmode{} so that it starts up with your favorite
1174 combination of them (@pxref{Sample Init File}). By default, when
1175 you initialize a buffer, electric mode and syntactic-indentation mode
1176 are enabled but the other three modes are disabled.
1177
1178 @ccmode{} displays the current state of the first four of these minor
1179 modes on the modeline by appending letters to the major mode's name,
1180 one letter for each enabled minor mode: @samp{l} for electric mode,
1181 @samp{a} for auto-newline mode, @samp{h} for hungry delete mode, and
1182 @samp{w} for subword mode. If all these modes were enabled, you'd see
1183 @samp{C/lahw}@footnote{The @samp{C} would be replaced with the name of
1184 the language in question for the other languages @ccmode{} supports.}.
1185
1186 Here are the commands to toggle these modes:
1187
1188 @table @asis
1189 @item @kbd{C-c C-l} (@code{c-toggle-electric-state})
1190 @kindex C-c C-l
1191 @findex c-toggle-electric-state
1192 @findex toggle-electric-state (c-)
1193 Toggle electric minor mode. When the command turns the mode off, it
1194 also suppresses auto-newline mode.
1195
1196 @item @kbd{C-c C-a} (@code{c-toggle-auto-newline})
1197 @kindex C-c C-a
1198 @findex c-toggle-auto-newline
1199 @findex toggle-auto-newline (c-)
1200 Toggle auto-newline minor mode. When the command turns the mode on,
1201 it also enables electric minor mode.
1202
1203 @item @kbd{M-x c-toggle-hungry-state}@footnote{Prior to @ccmode{} 5.31, this command was bound to @kbd{C-c C-d}.}
1204 @findex c-toggle-hungry-state
1205 @findex toggle-hungry-state (c-)
1206 Toggle hungry-delete minor mode.
1207
1208 @item @kbd{M-x c-toggle-auto-hungry-state}@footnote{Prior to @ccmode{} 5.31, this command was bound to @kbd{C-c C-t}.}
1209 @findex c-toggle-auto-hungry-state
1210 @findex toggle-auto-hungry-state (c-)
1211 Toggle both auto-newline and hungry delete minor modes.
1212
1213 @item @kbd{C-c C-w} (@code{M-x subword-mode})
1214 @kindex C-c C-w
1215 @findex subword-mode
1216 Toggle subword mode.
1217
1218 @item @kbd{M-x c-toggle-syntactic-indentation}
1219 @findex c-toggle-syntactic-indentation
1220 @findex toggle-syntactic-indentation (c-)
1221 Toggle syntactic-indentation mode.
1222 @end table
1223
1224 Common to all the toggle functions above is that if they are called
1225 programmatically, they take an optional numerical argument. A
1226 positive value will turn on the minor mode (or both of them in the
1227 case of @code{c-toggle-auto-hungry-state}) and a negative value will
1228 turn it (or them) off.
1229
1230
1231 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1232 @node Electric Keys, Auto-newlines, Minor Modes, Commands
1233 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1234 @section Electric Keys and Keywords
1235 @cindex electric characters
1236 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1237
1238 Most punctuation keys provide @dfn{electric} behavior: as well as
1239 inserting themselves they perform some other action, such as
1240 reindenting the line. This reindentation saves you from having to
1241 reindent a line manually after typing, say, a @samp{@}}. A few
1242 keywords, such as @code{else}, also trigger electric action.
1243
1244 You can inhibit the electric behavior described here by disabling
1245 electric minor mode (@pxref{Minor Modes}).
1246
1247 Common to all these keys is that they only behave electrically when
1248 used in normal code (as contrasted with getting typed in a string
1249 literal or comment). Those which cause re-indentation do so only when
1250 @code{c-syntactic-indentation} has a non-@code{nil} value (which it
1251 does by default).
1252
1253 These keys and keywords are:
1254 @c ACM, 2004/8/24: c-electric-pound doesn't check c-s-i: this is more
1255 @c like a bug in the code than a bug in this document. It'll get
1256 @c fixed in the code sometime.
1257
1258 @table @kbd
1259 @item #
1260 @kindex #
1261 @findex c-electric-pound
1262 @findex electric-pound (c-)
1263 @vindex c-electric-pound-behavior
1264 @vindex electric-pound-behavior (c-)
1265 Pound (bound to @code{c-electric-pound}) is electric when typed as the
1266 first non-whitespace character on a line and not within a macro
1267 definition. In this case, the variable @code{c-electric-pound-behavior}
1268 is consulted for the electric behavior. This variable takes a list
1269 value, although the only element currently defined is @code{alignleft},
1270 which tells this command to force the @samp{#} character into column
1271 zero. This is useful for entering preprocessor macro definitions.
1272
1273 Pound is not electric in AWK buffers, where @samp{#} starts a comment,
1274 and is bound to @code{self-insert-command} like any typical printable
1275 character.
1276 @c ACM, 2004/8/24: Change this (and the code) to do AWK comment
1277 @c reindentation.
1278
1279 @item *
1280 @kindex *
1281 @itemx /
1282 @kindex /
1283 @findex c-electric-star
1284 @findex electric-star (c-)
1285 @findex c-electric-slash
1286 @findex electric-slash (c-)
1287 A star (bound to @code{c-electric-star}) or a slash
1288 (@code{c-electric-slash}) causes reindentation when you type it as the
1289 second component of a C style block comment opener (@samp{/*}) or a
1290 C++ line comment opener (@samp{//}) respectively, but only if the
1291 comment opener is the first thing on the line (i.e., there's only
1292 whitespace before it).
1293
1294 Additionally, you can configure @ccmode{} so that typing a slash at
1295 the start of a line within a block comment will terminate the
1296 comment. You don't need to have electric minor mode enabled to get
1297 this behavior. @xref{Clean-ups}.
1298
1299 In AWK mode, @samp{*} and @samp{/} do not delimit comments and are not
1300 electric.
1301
1302 @item <
1303 @kindex <
1304 @itemx >
1305 @kindex >
1306 @findex c-electric-lt-gt
1307 @findex electric-lt-gt (c-)
1308 A less-than or greater-than sign (bound to @code{c-electric-lt-gt}) is
1309 electric in two circumstances: when it is an angle bracket in a C++
1310 @samp{template} declaration (and similar constructs in other
1311 languages) and when it is the second of two @kbd{<} or @kbd{>}
1312 characters in a C++ style stream operator. In either case, the line
1313 is reindented. Angle brackets in C @samp{#include} directives are not
1314 electric.
1315
1316 @item (
1317 @kindex (
1318 @itemx )
1319 @kindex )
1320 @findex c-electric-paren
1321 @findex electric-paren (c-)
1322 The normal parenthesis characters @samp{(} and @samp{)} (bound to
1323 @code{c-electric-paren}) reindent the current line. This is useful
1324 for getting the closing parenthesis of an argument list aligned
1325 automatically.
1326
1327 You can also configure @ccmode{} to insert a space automatically
1328 between a function name and the @samp{(} you've just typed, and to
1329 remove it automatically after typing @samp{)}, should the argument
1330 list be empty. You don't need to have electric minor mode enabled to
1331 get these actions. @xref{Clean-ups}.
1332
1333 @item @{
1334 @kindex @{
1335 @itemx @}
1336 @kindex @}
1337 @findex c-electric-brace
1338 @findex electric-brace (c-)
1339 Typing a brace (bound to @code{c-electric-brace}) reindents the
1340 current line. Also, one or more newlines might be inserted if
1341 auto-newline minor mode is enabled. @xref{Auto-newlines}.
1342 Additionally, you can configure @ccmode{} to compact excess whitespace
1343 inserted by auto-newline mode in certain circumstances.
1344 @xref{Clean-ups}.
1345
1346 @item :
1347 @kindex :
1348 @findex c-electric-colon
1349 @findex electric-colon (c-)
1350 Typing a colon (bound to @code{c-electric-colon}) reindents the
1351 current line. Additionally, one or more newlines might be inserted if
1352 auto-newline minor mode is enabled. @xref{Auto-newlines}. If you
1353 type a second colon immediately after such an auto-newline, by default
1354 the whitespace between the two colons is removed, leaving a C++ scope
1355 operator. @xref{Clean-ups}.
1356
1357 If you prefer, you can insert @samp{::} in a single operation,
1358 avoiding all these spurious reindentations, newlines, and clean-ups.
1359 @xref{Other Commands}.
1360
1361 @item ;
1362 @kindex ;
1363 @itemx ,
1364 @kindex ,
1365 @findex c-electric-semi&comma
1366 @findex electric-semi&comma (c-)
1367 Typing a semicolon or comma (bound to @code{c-electric-semi&comma})
1368 reindents the current line. Also, a newline might be inserted if
1369 auto-newline minor mode is enabled. @xref{Auto-newlines}.
1370 Additionally, you can configure @ccmode{} so that when auto-newline
1371 has inserted whitespace after a @samp{@}}, it will be removed again
1372 when you type a semicolon or comma just after it. @xref{Clean-ups}.
1373
1374 @end table
1375
1376 @deffn Command c-electric-continued-statement
1377 @findex electric-continued-statement (c-)
1378
1379 Certain keywords are electric, causing reindentation when they are
1380 preceded only by whitespace on the line. The keywords are those that
1381 continue an earlier statement instead of starting a new one:
1382 @code{else}, @code{while}, @code{catch} (only in C++ and Java) and
1383 @code{finally} (only in Java).
1384
1385 An example:
1386
1387 @example
1388 @group
1389 for (i = 0; i < 17; i++)
1390 if (a[i])
1391 res += a[i]->offset;
1392 else
1393 @end group
1394 @end example
1395
1396 Here, the @code{else} should be indented like the preceding @code{if},
1397 since it continues that statement. @ccmode{} will automatically
1398 reindent it after the @code{else} has been typed in full, since only
1399 then is it possible to decide whether it's a new statement or a
1400 continuation of the preceding @code{if}.
1401
1402 @vindex abbrev-mode
1403 @findex abbrev-mode
1404 @cindex Abbrev mode
1405 @ccmode{} uses Abbrev mode (@pxref{Abbrevs,,,@emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}})
1406 to accomplish this. It's therefore turned on by default in all language
1407 modes except IDL mode, since CORBA IDL doesn't have any statements.
1408 @end deffn
1409
1410
1411 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1412 @node Auto-newlines, Hungry WS Deletion, Electric Keys, Commands
1413 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1414 @section Auto-newline Insertion
1415 @cindex auto-newline
1416 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1417
1418 When you have @dfn{Auto-newline minor mode} enabled (@pxref{Minor
1419 Modes}), @ccmode{} inserts newlines for you automatically (in certain
1420 syntactic contexts) when you type a left or right brace, a colon, a
1421 semicolon, or a comma. Sometimes a newline appears before the
1422 character you type, sometimes after it, sometimes both.
1423
1424 Auto-newline only triggers when the following conditions hold:
1425
1426 @itemize @bullet
1427 @item
1428 Auto-newline minor mode is enabled, as evidenced by the indicator
1429 @samp{a} after the mode name on the modeline (e.g., @samp{C/a} or
1430 @samp{C/la}).
1431
1432 @item
1433 The character was typed at the end of a line, or with only whitespace
1434 after it, and possibly a @samp{\} escaping the newline.
1435
1436 @item
1437 The character is not on its own line already. (This applies only to
1438 insertion of a newline @emph{before} the character.)
1439
1440 @item
1441 @cindex literal
1442 @cindex syntactic whitespace
1443 The character was not typed inside of a literal @footnote{A
1444 @dfn{literal} is defined as any comment, string, or preprocessor macro
1445 definition. These constructs are also known as @dfn{syntactic
1446 whitespace} since they are usually ignored when scanning C code.}.
1447
1448 @item
1449 No numeric argument was supplied to the command (i.e., it was typed as
1450 normal, with no @kbd{C-u} prefix).
1451 @end itemize
1452
1453 You can configure the precise circumstances in which newlines get
1454 inserted (see @pxref{Custom Auto-newlines}). Typically, the style
1455 system (@pxref{Styles}) will have set this up for you, so you probably
1456 won't have to bother.
1457
1458 Sometimes @ccmode{} inserts an auto-newline where you don't want one,
1459 such as after a @samp{@}} when you're about to type a @samp{;}.
1460 Hungry deletion can help here (@pxref{Hungry WS Deletion}), or you can
1461 activate an appropriate @dfn{clean-up}, which will remove the excess
1462 whitespace after you've typed the @samp{;}. See @ref{Clean-ups} for a
1463 full description. See also @ref{Electric Keys} for a summary of
1464 clean-ups listed by key.
1465
1466
1467 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1468 @node Hungry WS Deletion, Subword Movement, Auto-newlines, Commands
1469 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1470 @section Hungry Deletion of Whitespace
1471 @cindex hungry-deletion
1472 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1473
1474 If you want to delete an entire block of whitespace at point, you can
1475 use @dfn{hungry deletion}. This deletes all the contiguous whitespace
1476 either before point or after point in a single operation.
1477 ``Whitespace'' here includes tabs and newlines, but not comments or
1478 preprocessor commands. Hungry deletion can markedly cut down on the
1479 number of times you have to hit deletion keys when, for example,
1480 you've made a mistake on the preceding line and have already pressed
1481 @kbd{C-j}.
1482
1483 Hungry deletion is a simple feature that some people find extremely
1484 useful. In fact, you might find yourself wanting it in @strong{all}
1485 your editing modes!
1486
1487 Loosely speaking, in what follows, @dfn{@key{DEL}} means ``the
1488 backspace key'' and @dfn{@key{DELETE}} means ``the forward delete
1489 key''. This is discussed in more detail below.
1490
1491 There are two different ways you can use hungry deletion:
1492
1493 @table @asis
1494 @item Using @dfn{Hungry Delete Mode} with @kbd{@key{DEL}} and @kbd{C-d}
1495 Here you toggle Hungry Delete minor mode with @kbd{M-x
1496 c-toggle-hungry-state}@footnote{Prior to @ccmode{} 5.31, this command
1497 was bound to @kbd{C-c C-d}. @kbd{C-c C-d} is now the default binding
1498 for @code{c-hungry-delete-forward}.} (@pxref{Minor Modes}.) This
1499 makes @kbd{@key{DEL}} and @kbd{C-d} do backwards and forward hungry
1500 deletion.
1501
1502 @table @asis
1503 @item @kbd{@key{DEL}} (@code{c-electric-backspace})
1504 @kindex DEL
1505 @findex c-electric-backspace
1506 @findex electric-backspace (c-)
1507 This command is run by default when you hit the @kbd{DEL} key. When
1508 hungry delete mode is enabled, it deletes any amount of whitespace in
1509 the backwards direction. Otherwise, or when used with a prefix
1510 argument or in a literal (@pxref{Auto-newlines}), the command just
1511 deletes backwards in the usual way. (More precisely, it calls the
1512 function contained in the variable @code{c-backspace-function},
1513 passing it the prefix argument, if any.)
1514
1515 @item @code{c-backspace-function}
1516 @vindex c-backspace-function
1517 @vindex backspace-function (c-)
1518 @findex backward-delete-char-untabify
1519 Hook that gets called by @code{c-electric-backspace} when it doesn't
1520 do an ``electric'' deletion of the preceding whitespace. The default
1521 value is @code{backward-delete-char-untabify}
1522 (@pxref{Deletion,,,@lispref{}, @lispreftitle{}}, the function which
1523 deletes a single character.
1524
1525 @item @kbd{C-d} (@code{c-electric-delete-forward})
1526 @kindex C-d
1527 @findex c-electric-delete-forward
1528 @findex electric-delete-forward (c-)
1529 This function, which is bound to @kbd{C-d} by default, works just like
1530 @code{c-electric-backspace} but in the forward direction. When it
1531 doesn't do an ``electric'' deletion of the following whitespace, it
1532 just does @code{delete-char}, more or less. (Strictly speaking, it
1533 calls the function in @code{c-delete-function} with the prefix
1534 argument.)
1535
1536 @item @code{c-delete-function}
1537 @vindex c-delete-function
1538 @vindex delete-function (c-)
1539 @findex delete-char
1540 Hook that gets called by @code{c-electric-delete-forward} when it
1541 doesn't do an ``electric'' deletion of the following whitespace. The
1542 default value is @code{delete-char}.
1543 @end table
1544
1545 @item Using Distinct Bindings
1546 The other (newer and recommended) way to use hungry deletion is to
1547 perform @code{c-hungry-delete-backwards} and
1548 @code{c-hungry-delete-forward} directly through their key sequences
1549 rather than using the minor mode toggling.
1550
1551 @table @asis
1552 @item @kbd{C-c C-@key{DEL}}, or @kbd{C-c @key{DEL}} (@code{c-hungry-delete-backwards})@footnote{This command was formerly known as @code{c-hungry-backspace}.}
1553 @kindex C-c C-<backspace>
1554 @kindex C-c <backspace>
1555 @kindex C-c C-DEL
1556 @kindex C-c DEL
1557 @findex c-hungry-delete-backwards
1558 @findex hungry-delete-backwards (c-)
1559 Delete any amount of whitespace in the backwards direction (regardless
1560 whether hungry-delete mode is enabled or not). This command is bound
1561 to both @kbd{C-c C-@key{DEL}} and @kbd{C-c @key{DEL}}, since the more
1562 natural one, @kbd{C-c C-@key{DEL}}, is sometimes difficult to type at
1563 a character terminal.
1564
1565 @item @kbd{C-c C-d}, @kbd{C-c C-@key{DELETE}}, or @kbd{C-c @key{DELETE}} (@code{c-hungry-delete-forward})
1566 @kindex C-c C-d
1567 @kindex C-c C-<DELETE>
1568 @kindex C-c <DELETE>
1569 @findex c-hungry-delete-forward
1570 @findex hungry-delete-forward (c-)
1571 Delete any amount of whitespace in the forward direction (regardless
1572 whether hungry-delete mode is enabled or not). This command is bound
1573 to both @kbd{C-c C-@key{DELETE}} and @kbd{C-c @key{DELETE}} for the
1574 same reason as for @key{DEL} above.
1575 @end table
1576 @end table
1577
1578 @kindex <delete>
1579 @kindex <backspace>
1580
1581 When we talk about @kbd{@key{DEL}}, and @kbd{@key{DELETE}} above, we
1582 actually do so without connecting them to the physical keys commonly
1583 known as @key{Backspace} and @key{Delete}. The default bindings to
1584 those two keys depends on the flavor of (X)Emacs you are using.
1585
1586 @findex c-electric-delete
1587 @findex electric-delete (c-)
1588 @findex c-hungry-delete
1589 @findex hungry-delete (c-)
1590 @vindex delete-key-deletes-forward
1591 In XEmacs 20.3 and beyond, the @key{Backspace} key is bound to
1592 @code{c-electric-backspace} and the @key{Delete} key is bound to
1593 @code{c-electric-delete}. You control the direction it deletes in by
1594 setting the variable @code{delete-key-deletes-forward}, a standard
1595 XEmacs variable.
1596 @c This variable is encapsulated by XEmacs's (defsubst delete-forward-p ...).
1597 When this variable is non-@code{nil}, @code{c-electric-delete} will do
1598 forward deletion with @code{c-electric-delete-forward}, otherwise it
1599 does backward deletion with @code{c-electric-backspace}. Similarly,
1600 @kbd{C-c @key{Delete}} and @kbd{C-c C-@key{Delete}} are bound to
1601 @code{c-hungry-delete} which is controlled in the same way by
1602 @code{delete-key-deletes-forward}.
1603
1604 @findex normal-erase-is-backspace-mode
1605
1606 Emacs 21 and later automatically binds @key{Backspace} and
1607 @key{Delete} to @kbd{DEL} and @kbd{C-d} according to your environment,
1608 and @ccmode{} extends those bindings to @kbd{C-c C-@key{Backspace}}
1609 etc. If you need to change the bindings through
1610 @code{normal-erase-is-backspace-mode} then @ccmode{} will also adapt
1611 its extended bindings accordingly.
1612
1613 In earlier (X)Emacs versions, @ccmode{} doesn't bind either
1614 @key{Backspace} or @key{Delete} directly. Only the key codes
1615 @kbd{DEL} and @kbd{C-d} are bound, and it's up to the default bindings
1616 to map the physical keys to them. You might need to modify this
1617 yourself if the defaults are unsuitable.
1618
1619 Getting your @key{Backspace} and @key{Delete} keys properly set up can
1620 sometimes be tricky. The information in @ref{DEL Does Not
1621 Delete,,,emacs, GNU Emacs Manual}, might be helpful if you're having
1622 trouble with this in GNU Emacs.
1623
1624
1625 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1626 @node Subword Movement, Other Commands, Hungry WS Deletion, Commands
1627 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1628 @section Subword Movement and Editing
1629 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1630
1631 @cindex nomenclature
1632 @cindex subword
1633 In spite of the GNU Coding Standards, it is popular to name a symbol
1634 by mixing uppercase and lowercase letters, e.g., @samp{GtkWidget},
1635 @samp{EmacsFrameClass}, or @samp{NSGraphicsContext}. Here we call
1636 these mixed case symbols @dfn{nomenclatures}. Also, each capitalized
1637 (or completely uppercase) part of a nomenclature is called a
1638 @dfn{subword}. Here are some examples:
1639
1640 @multitable {@samp{NSGraphicsContext}} {@samp{NS}, @samp{Graphics}, and @samp{Context}}
1641 @c This could be converted to @headitem when we require Texinfo 4.7
1642 @iftex
1643 @item @b{Nomenclature}
1644 @tab @b{Subwords}
1645 @end iftex
1646 @ifnottex
1647 @item Nomenclature
1648 @tab Subwords
1649 @item ---------------------------------------------------------
1650 @end ifnottex
1651 @item @samp{GtkWindow}
1652 @tab @samp{Gtk} and @samp{Window}
1653 @item @samp{EmacsFrameClass}
1654 @tab @samp{Emacs}, @samp{Frame}, and @samp{Class}
1655 @item @samp{NSGraphicsContext}
1656 @tab @samp{NS}, @samp{Graphics}, and @samp{Context}
1657 @end multitable
1658
1659 The subword minor mode replaces the basic word oriented movement and
1660 editing commands with variants that recognize subwords in a
1661 nomenclature and treat them as separate words:
1662
1663 @findex c-forward-subword
1664 @findex forward-subword (c-)
1665 @findex c-backward-subword
1666 @findex backward-subword (c-)
1667 @findex c-mark-subword
1668 @findex mark-subword (c-)
1669 @findex c-kill-subword
1670 @findex kill-subword (c-)
1671 @findex c-backward-kill-subword
1672 @findex backward-kill-subword (c-)
1673 @findex c-transpose-subwords
1674 @findex transpose-subwords (c-)
1675 @findex c-capitalize-subword
1676 @findex capitalize-subword (c-)
1677 @findex c-upcase-subword
1678 @findex upcase-subword (c-)
1679 @findex c-downcase-subword
1680 @findex downcase-subword (c-)
1681 @multitable @columnfractions .20 .40 .40
1682 @c This could be converted to @headitem when we require Texinfo 4.7
1683 @iftex
1684 @item @b{Key} @tab @b{Word oriented command} @tab @b{Subword oriented command}
1685 @end iftex
1686 @ifnottex
1687 @item Key @tab Word oriented command @tab Subword oriented command
1688 @item ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
1689 @end ifnottex
1690 @item @kbd{M-f} @tab @code{forward-word} @tab @code{c-forward-subword}
1691 @item @kbd{M-b} @tab @code{backward-word} @tab @code{c-backward-subword}
1692 @item @kbd{M-@@} @tab @code{mark-word} @tab @code{c-mark-subword}
1693 @item @kbd{M-d} @tab @code{kill-word} @tab @code{c-kill-subword}
1694 @item @kbd{M-DEL} @tab @code{backward-kill-word} @tab @code{c-backward-kill-subword}
1695 @item @kbd{M-t} @tab @code{transpose-words} @tab @code{c-transpose-subwords}
1696 @item @kbd{M-c} @tab @code{capitalize-word} @tab @code{c-capitalize-subword}
1697 @item @kbd{M-u} @tab @code{upcase-word} @tab @code{c-upcase-subword}
1698 @item @kbd{M-l} @tab @code{downcase-word} @tab @code{c-downcase-subword}
1699 @end multitable
1700
1701 Note that if you have changed the key bindings for the word oriented
1702 commands in your @file{.emacs} or a similar place, the keys you have
1703 configured are also used for the corresponding subword oriented
1704 commands.
1705
1706 Type @kbd{C-c C-w} to toggle subword mode on and off. To make the
1707 mode turn on automatically, put the following code in your
1708 @file{.emacs}:
1709
1710 @example
1711 (add-hook 'c-mode-common-hook
1712 (lambda () (subword-mode 1)))
1713 @end example
1714
1715 As a bonus, you can also use @code{subword-mode} in non-@ccmode{}
1716 buffers by typing @kbd{M-x subword-mode}.
1717
1718 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1719 @node Other Commands, , Subword Movement, Commands
1720 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1721 @section Other Commands
1722 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1723
1724 Here are the various other commands that didn't fit anywhere else:
1725
1726 @table @asis
1727 @item @kbd{C-c .} (@code{c-set-style})
1728 @kindex C-c .
1729 @findex c-set-style
1730 @findex set-style (c-)
1731 Switch to the specified style in the current buffer. Use like this:
1732
1733 @example
1734 @kbd{C-c . @var{style-name} @key{RET}}
1735 @end example
1736
1737 You can use the @key{TAB} in the normal way to do completion on the
1738 style name. Note that all style names are case insensitive, even the
1739 ones you define yourself.
1740
1741 Setting a style in this way does @emph{not} automatically reindent your
1742 file. For commands that you can use to view the effect of your changes,
1743 see @ref{Indentation Commands} and @ref{Filling and Breaking}.
1744
1745 For details of the @ccmode{} style system, see @ref{Styles}.
1746 @item @kbd{C-c :} (@code{c-scope-operator})
1747 @kindex C-c :
1748 @findex c-scope-operator
1749 @findex scope-operator (c-)
1750 In C++, it is also sometimes desirable to insert the double-colon scope
1751 operator without performing the electric behavior of colon insertion.
1752 @kbd{C-c :} does just this.
1753
1754 @item @kbd{C-c C-\} (@code{c-backslash-region})
1755 @kindex C-c C-\
1756 @findex c-backslash-region
1757 @findex backslash-region (c-)
1758 This function inserts and aligns or deletes end-of-line backslashes in
1759 the current region. These are typically used in multi-line macros.
1760
1761 With no prefix argument, it inserts any missing backslashes and aligns
1762 them according to the @code{c-backslash-column} and
1763 @code{c-backslash-max-column} variables. With a prefix argument, it
1764 deletes any backslashes.
1765
1766 The function does not modify blank lines at the start of the region. If
1767 the region ends at the start of a line, it always deletes the backslash
1768 (if any) at the end of the previous line.
1769
1770 To customize the precise workings of this command, @ref{Custom Macros}.
1771 @end table
1772
1773 @noindent
1774 The recommended line breaking function, @code{c-context-line-break}
1775 (@pxref{Filling and Breaking}), is especially nice if you edit
1776 multiline macros frequently. When used inside a macro, it
1777 automatically inserts and adjusts the mandatory backslash at the end
1778 of the line to keep the macro together, and it leaves the point at the
1779 right indentation column for the code. Thus you can write code inside
1780 macros almost exactly as you can elsewhere, without having to bother
1781 with the trailing backslashes.
1782
1783 @table @asis
1784 @item @kbd{C-c C-e} (@code{c-macro-expand})
1785 @kindex C-c C-e
1786 @findex c-macro-expand
1787 @findex macro-expand (c-)
1788 This command expands C, C++, Objective C or Pike macros in the region,
1789 using an appropriate external preprocessor program. Normally it
1790 displays its output in a temporary buffer, but if you give it a prefix
1791 arg (with @kbd{C-u C-c C-e}) it will overwrite the original region
1792 with the expansion.
1793
1794 The command does not work in any of the other modes, and the key
1795 sequence is not bound in these other modes.
1796
1797 @code{c-macro-expand} isn't actually part of @ccmode{}, even though it
1798 is bound to a @ccmode{} key sequence. If you need help setting it up
1799 or have other problems with it, you can either read its source code or
1800 ask for help in the standard (X)Emacs forums.
1801 @end table
1802
1803 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1804 @node Font Locking, Config Basics, Commands, Top
1805 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1806 @chapter Font Locking
1807 @cindex font locking
1808 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1809
1810 @cindex Font Lock mode
1811
1812 @ccmode{} provides font locking for its supported languages by
1813 supplying patterns for use with Font Lock mode. This means that you
1814 get distinct faces on the various syntactic parts such as comments,
1815 strings, keywords and types, which is very helpful in telling them
1816 apart at a glance and discovering syntactic errors. @xref{Font
1817 Lock,,, emacs, GNU Emacs Manual}, for ways to enable font locking in
1818 @ccmode{} buffers.
1819
1820 @strong{Please note:} The font locking in AWK mode is currently not
1821 integrated with the rest of @ccmode{}. Only the last section of this
1822 chapter, @ref{AWK Mode Font Locking}, applies to AWK@. The other
1823 sections apply to the other languages.
1824
1825 @menu
1826 * Font Locking Preliminaries::
1827 * Faces::
1828 * Doc Comments::
1829 * AWK Mode Font Locking::
1830 @end menu
1831
1832
1833 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1834 @node Font Locking Preliminaries, Faces, Font Locking, Font Locking
1835 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1836 @section Font Locking Preliminaries
1837 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1838
1839 The font locking for most of the @ccmode{} languages were provided
1840 directly by the Font Lock package prior to version 5.30 of @ccmode{}.
1841 In the transition to @ccmode{} the patterns have been reworked
1842 completely and are applied uniformly across all the languages except AWK
1843 mode, just like the indentation rules (although each language still has
1844 some peculiarities of its own, of course). Since the languages
1845 previously had completely separate font locking patterns, this means
1846 that it's a bit different in most languages now.
1847
1848 The main goal for the font locking in @ccmode{} is accuracy, to provide
1849 a dependable aid in recognizing the various constructs. Some, like
1850 strings and comments, are easy to recognize while others, like
1851 declarations and types, can be very tricky. @ccmode{} can go to great
1852 lengths to recognize declarations and casts correctly, especially when
1853 the types aren't recognized by standard patterns. This is a fairly
1854 demanding analysis which can be slow on older hardware, and it can
1855 therefore be disabled by choosing a lower decoration level with the
1856 variable @code{font-lock-maximum-decoration} (@pxref{Font Lock,,,
1857 emacs, GNU Emacs Manual}).
1858
1859 @vindex font-lock-maximum-decoration
1860
1861 The decoration levels are used as follows:
1862
1863 @enumerate
1864 @comment 1
1865 @item
1866 Minimal font locking: Fontify only comments, strings and preprocessor
1867 directives (in the languages that use cpp).
1868
1869 @comment 2
1870 @item
1871 Fast font locking: In addition to level 1, fontify keywords, simple
1872 types and declarations that are easy to recognize. The variables
1873 @code{*-font-lock-extra-types} (where @samp{*} is the name of the
1874 language) are used to recognize types (see below). Documentation
1875 comments like Javadoc are fontified according to
1876 @code{c-doc-comment-style} (@pxref{Doc Comments}).
1877
1878 Use this if you think the font locking is too slow. It's the closest
1879 corresponding level to level 3 in the old font lock patterns.
1880
1881 @comment 3
1882 @item
1883 Accurate font locking: Like level 2 but uses a different approach that
1884 can recognize types and declarations much more accurately. The
1885 @code{*-font-lock-extra-types} variables are still used, but user
1886 defined types are recognized correctly anyway in most cases. Therefore
1887 those variables should be fairly restrictive and not contain patterns
1888 that are uncertain.
1889
1890 @cindex Lazy Lock mode
1891 @cindex Just-in-time Lock mode
1892
1893 This level is designed for fairly modern hardware and a font lock
1894 support mode like Lazy Lock or Just-in-time Lock mode that only
1895 fontifies the parts that are actually shown. Fontifying the whole
1896 buffer at once can easily get bothersomely slow even on contemporary
1897 hardware. @xref{Font Lock,,,@emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}}.
1898 @end enumerate
1899
1900 @cindex user defined types
1901 @cindex types, user defined
1902
1903 Since user defined types are hard to recognize you can provide
1904 additional regexps to match those you use:
1905
1906 @defopt c-font-lock-extra-types
1907 @defoptx c++-font-lock-extra-types
1908 @defoptx objc-font-lock-extra-types
1909 @defoptx java-font-lock-extra-types
1910 @defoptx idl-font-lock-extra-types
1911 @defoptx pike-font-lock-extra-types
1912 For each language there's a variable @code{*-font-lock-extra-types},
1913 where @samp{*} stands for the language in question. It contains a list
1914 of regexps that matches identifiers that should be recognized as types,
1915 e.g., @samp{\\sw+_t} to recognize all identifiers ending with @samp{_t}
1916 as is customary in C code. Each regexp should not match more than a
1917 single identifier.
1918
1919 The default values contain regexps for many types in standard runtime
1920 libraries that are otherwise difficult to recognize, and patterns for
1921 standard type naming conventions like the @samp{_t} suffix in C and C++.
1922 Java, Objective-C and Pike have as a convention to start class names
1923 with capitals, so there are patterns for that in those languages.
1924
1925 Despite the names of these variables, they are not only used for
1926 fontification but in other places as well where @ccmode{} needs to
1927 recognize types.
1928 @end defopt
1929
1930
1931 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1932 @node Faces, Doc Comments, Font Locking Preliminaries, Font Locking
1933 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1934 @section Faces
1935 @cindex faces
1936 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1937
1938 @ccmode{} attempts to use the standard faces for programming languages
1939 in accordance with their intended purposes as far as possible. No extra
1940 faces are currently provided, with the exception of a replacement face
1941 @code{c-invalid-face} for emacsen that don't provide
1942 @code{font-lock-warning-face}.
1943
1944 @itemize @bullet
1945 @item
1946 @vindex font-lock-comment-face
1947 Normal comments are fontified in @code{font-lock-comment-face}.
1948
1949 @item
1950 @vindex font-lock-doc-face
1951 @vindex font-lock-doc-string-face
1952 @vindex font-lock-comment-face
1953 Comments that are recognized as documentation (@pxref{Doc Comments})
1954 get @code{font-lock-doc-face} (Emacs) or
1955 @code{font-lock-doc-string-face} (XEmacs) if those faces exist. If
1956 they don't then @code{font-lock-comment-face} is used.
1957
1958 @item
1959 @vindex font-lock-string-face
1960 String and character literals are fontified in
1961 @code{font-lock-string-face}.
1962
1963 @item
1964 @vindex font-lock-keyword-face
1965 Keywords are fontified with @code{font-lock-keyword-face}.
1966
1967 @item
1968 @vindex font-lock-function-name-face
1969 @code{font-lock-function-name-face} is used for function names in
1970 declarations and definitions, and classes in those contexts. It's also
1971 used for preprocessor defines with arguments.
1972
1973 @item
1974 @vindex font-lock-variable-name-face
1975 Variables in declarations and definitions, and other identifiers in such
1976 variable contexts, get @code{font-lock-variable-name-face}. It's also
1977 used for preprocessor defines without arguments.
1978
1979 @item
1980 @vindex font-lock-constant-face
1981 @vindex font-lock-reference-face
1982 Builtin constants are fontified in @code{font-lock-constant-face} if it
1983 exists, @code{font-lock-reference-face} otherwise. As opposed to the
1984 preceding two faces, this is used on the names in expressions, and it's
1985 not used in declarations, even if there happen to be a @samp{const} in
1986 them somewhere.
1987
1988 @item
1989 @vindex font-lock-type-face
1990 @code{font-lock-type-face} is put on types (both predefined and user
1991 defined) and classes in type contexts.
1992
1993 @item
1994 @vindex font-lock-constant-face
1995 @vindex font-lock-reference-face
1996 Label identifiers get @code{font-lock-constant-face} if it exists,
1997 @code{font-lock-reference-face} otherwise.
1998
1999 @item
2000 Name qualifiers and identifiers for scope constructs are fontified like
2001 labels.
2002
2003 @item
2004 Special markup inside documentation comments are also fontified like
2005 labels.
2006
2007 @item
2008 @vindex font-lock-preprocessor-face
2009 @vindex font-lock-builtin-face
2010 @vindex font-lock-reference-face
2011 Preprocessor directives get @code{font-lock-preprocessor-face} if it
2012 exists (i.e., XEmacs). In Emacs they get @code{font-lock-builtin-face}
2013 or @code{font-lock-reference-face}, for lack of a closer equivalent.
2014
2015 @item
2016 @vindex font-lock-warning-face
2017 @vindex c-invalid-face
2018 @vindex invalid-face (c-)
2019 Some kinds of syntactic errors are fontified with
2020 @code{font-lock-warning-face} in Emacs. In older XEmacs versions
2021 there's no corresponding standard face, so there a special
2022 @code{c-invalid-face} is used, which is defined to stand out sharply by
2023 default.
2024
2025 Note that it's not used for @samp{#error} or @samp{#warning} directives,
2026 since those aren't syntactic errors in themselves.
2027 @end itemize
2028
2029
2030 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2031 @node Doc Comments, AWK Mode Font Locking, Faces, Font Locking
2032 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2033 @section Documentation Comments
2034 @cindex documentation comments
2035 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2036
2037 There are various tools to supply documentation in the source as
2038 specially structured comments, e.g., the standard Javadoc tool in Java.
2039 @ccmode{} provides an extensible mechanism to fontify such comments and
2040 the special markup inside them.
2041
2042 @defopt c-doc-comment-style
2043 @vindex doc-comment-style (c-)
2044 This is a style variable that specifies which documentation comment
2045 style to recognize, e.g., @code{javadoc} for Javadoc comments.
2046
2047 The value may also be a list of styles, in which case all of them are
2048 recognized simultaneously (presumably with markup cues that don't
2049 conflict).
2050
2051 The value may also be an association list to specify different comment
2052 styles for different languages. The symbol for the major mode is then
2053 looked up in the alist, and the value of that element is interpreted as
2054 above if found. If it isn't found then the symbol `other' is looked up
2055 and its value is used instead.
2056
2057 The default value for @code{c-doc-comment-style} is
2058 @w{@code{((java-mode . javadoc) (pike-mode . autodoc) (c-mode . gtkdoc))}}.
2059
2060 Note that @ccmode{} uses this variable to set other variables that
2061 handle fontification etc. That's done at mode initialization or when
2062 you switch to a style which sets this variable. Thus, if you change it
2063 in some other way, e.g., interactively in a CC Mode buffer, you will need
2064 to do @kbd{M-x java-mode} (or whatever mode you're currently using) to
2065 reinitialize.
2066
2067 @findex c-setup-doc-comment-style
2068 @findex setup-doc-comment-style (c-)
2069 Note also that when @ccmode{} starts up, the other variables are
2070 modified before the mode hooks are run. If you change this variable in
2071 a mode hook, you'll have to call @code{c-setup-doc-comment-style}
2072 afterwards to redo that work.
2073 @end defopt
2074
2075 @ccmode{} currently provides handing of the following doc comment
2076 styles:
2077
2078 @table @code
2079 @item javadoc
2080 @cindex Javadoc markup
2081 Javadoc comments, the standard tool in Java.
2082
2083 @item autodoc
2084 @cindex Pike autodoc markup
2085 For Pike autodoc markup, the standard in Pike.
2086
2087 @item gtkdoc
2088 @cindex GtkDoc markup
2089 For GtkDoc markup, widely used in the Gnome community.
2090 @end table
2091
2092 The above is by no means complete. If you'd like to see support for
2093 other doc comment styles, please let us know (@pxref{Mailing Lists and
2094 Bug Reports}).
2095
2096 You can also write your own doc comment fontification support to use
2097 with @code{c-doc-comment-style}: Supply a variable or function
2098 @code{*-font-lock-keywords} where @samp{*} is the name you want to use
2099 in @code{c-doc-comment-style}. If it's a variable, it's prepended to
2100 @code{font-lock-keywords}. If it's a function, it's called at mode
2101 initialization and the result is prepended. For an example, see
2102 @code{javadoc-font-lock-keywords} in @file{cc-fonts.el}.
2103
2104 If you add support for another doc comment style, please consider
2105 contributing it: send a note to @email{bug-cc-mode@@gnu.org}.
2106
2107
2108 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2109 @node AWK Mode Font Locking, , Doc Comments, Font Locking
2110 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2111 @section AWK Mode Font Locking
2112 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2113
2114 The general appearance of font-locking in AWK mode is much like in any
2115 other programming mode. @xref{Faces for Font Lock,,,elisp, GNU Emacs
2116 Lisp Reference Manual}.
2117
2118 The following faces are, however, used in a non-standard fashion in
2119 AWK mode:
2120
2121 @table @asis
2122 @item @code{font-lock-variable-name-face}
2123 This face was intended for variable declarations. Since variables are
2124 not declared in AWK, this face is used instead for AWK system
2125 variables (such as @code{NF}) and ``Special File Names'' (such as
2126 @code{"/dev/stderr"}).
2127
2128 @item @code{font-lock-builtin-face} (Emacs)/@code{font-lock-preprocessor-face} (XEmacs)
2129 This face is normally used for preprocessor directives in @ccmode{}.
2130 There are no such things in AWK, so this face is used instead for
2131 standard functions (such as @code{match}).
2132
2133 @item @code{font-lock-string-face}
2134 As well as being used for strings, including localizable strings,
2135 (delimited by @samp{"} and @samp{_"}), this face is also used for AWK
2136 regular expressions (delimited by @samp{/}).
2137
2138 @item @code{font-lock-warning-face} (Emacs)/@code{c-invalid-face} (XEmacs)
2139 This face highlights the following syntactically invalid AWK
2140 constructs:
2141
2142 @itemize @bullet
2143 @item
2144 An unterminated string or regular expression. Here the opening
2145 delimiter (@samp{"} or @samp{/} or @samp{_"}) is displayed in
2146 @code{font-lock-warning-face}. This is most noticeable when typing in a
2147 new string/regular expression into a buffer, when the warning-face
2148 serves as a continual reminder to terminate the construct.
2149
2150 AWK mode fontifies unterminated strings/regular expressions
2151 differently from other modes: Only the text up to the end of the line
2152 is fontified as a string (escaped newlines being handled correctly),
2153 rather than the text up to the next string quote.
2154
2155 @item
2156 A space between the function name and opening parenthesis when calling
2157 a user function. The last character of the function name and the
2158 opening parenthesis are highlighted. This font-locking rule will
2159 spuriously highlight a valid concatenation expression where an
2160 identifier precedes a parenthesized expression. Unfortunately.
2161
2162 @item
2163 Whitespace following the @samp{\} in what otherwise looks like an
2164 escaped newline. The @samp{\} is highlighted.
2165 @end itemize
2166 @end table
2167
2168
2169 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2170 @node Config Basics, Custom Filling and Breaking, Font Locking, Top
2171 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2172 @chapter Configuration Basics
2173 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2174
2175 @cindex Emacs Initialization File
2176 @cindex Configuration
2177 You configure @ccmode{} by setting Lisp variables and calling (and
2178 perhaps writing) Lisp functions@footnote{DON'T PANIC!!! This isn't
2179 difficult.}, which is usually done by adding code to an Emacs
2180 initialization file. This file might be @file{site-start.el} or
2181 @file{.emacs} or @file{init.el} or @file{default.el} or perhaps some
2182 other file. @xref{Init File,,,@emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}}. For
2183 the sake of conciseness, we just call this file ``your @file{.emacs}''
2184 throughout the rest of the manual.
2185
2186 Several of these variables (currently 16), are known collectively as
2187 @dfn{style variables}. @ccmode{} provides a special mechanism, known
2188 as @dfn{styles} to make it easier to set these variables as a group,
2189 to ``inherit'' settings from one style into another, and so on. Style
2190 variables remain ordinary Lisp variables, whose values can be read and
2191 changed independently of the style system. @xref{Style Variables}.
2192
2193 There are several ways you can write the code, depending on the
2194 precise effect you want---they are described further down on this page.
2195 If you are new to @ccmode{}, we suggest you begin with the simplest
2196 method, ``Top-level commands or the customization interface''.
2197
2198 If you make conflicting settings in several of these ways, the way
2199 that takes precedence is the one that appears latest in this list:
2200 @itemize @w{}
2201 @item
2202 @table @asis
2203 @item Style
2204 @itemx File Style@footnote{In earlier versions of @ccmode{}, a File Style setting took precedence over any other setting apart from a File Local Variable setting.}
2205 @itemx Top-level command or ``customization interface''
2206 @itemx Hook
2207 @itemx File Local Variable setting
2208 @end table
2209 @end itemize
2210
2211 Here is a summary of the different ways of writing your configuration
2212 settings:
2213
2214 @table @asis
2215 @item Top-level commands or the ``customization interface''
2216 Most simply, you can write @code{setq} and similar commands at the top
2217 level of your @file{.emacs} file. When you load a @ccmode{} buffer,
2218 it initializes its configuration from these global values (at least,
2219 for those settings you have given values to), so it makes sense to
2220 have these @code{setq} commands run @emph{before} @ccmode{} is first
2221 initialized---in particular, before any call to @code{desktop-read}
2222 (@pxref{Saving Emacs Sessions,,, emacs, GNU Emacs Manual}). For
2223 example, you might set c-basic-offset thus:
2224
2225 @example
2226 (setq c-basic-offset 4)
2227 @end example
2228
2229 You can use the more user friendly Customization interface instead,
2230 but this manual does not cover in detail how that works. To do this,
2231 start by typing @kbd{M-x customize-group @key{RET} c @key{RET}}.
2232 @xref{Easy Customization,,,@emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}}.
2233 @c The following note really belongs in the Emacs manual.
2234 Emacs normally writes the customizations at the end of your
2235 @file{.emacs} file. If you use @code{desktop-read}, you should edit
2236 your @file{.emacs} to place the call to @code{desktop-read} @emph{after}
2237 the customizations.
2238
2239 The first initialization of @ccmode{} puts a snapshot of the
2240 configuration settings into the special style @code{user}.
2241 @xref{Built-in Styles}.
2242
2243 For basic use of Emacs, either of these ways of configuring is
2244 adequate. However, the settings are then the same in all @ccmode{}
2245 buffers and it can be clumsy to communicate them between programmers.
2246 For more flexibility, you'll want to use one (or both) of @ccmode{}'s
2247 more sophisticated facilities, hooks and styles.
2248
2249 @item Hooks
2250 An Emacs @dfn{hook} is a place to put Lisp functions that you want
2251 Emacs to execute later in specific circumstances.
2252 @xref{Hooks,,,@lispref{}, @lispreftitle{}}. @ccmode{} supplies a main
2253 hook and a language-specific hook for each language it supports; any
2254 functions you put onto these hooks get executed as the last part of a
2255 buffer's initialization. Typically you put most of your customization
2256 within the main hook, and use the language-specific hooks to vary the
2257 customization settings between language modes. For example, if you
2258 wanted different (non-standard) values of @code{c-basic-offset} in C
2259 Mode and Java Mode buffers, you could do it like this:
2260
2261 @example
2262 @group
2263 (defun my-c-mode-hook ()
2264 (setq c-basic-offset 3))
2265 (add-hook 'c-mode-hook 'my-c-mode-hook)
2266
2267 (defun my-java-mode-hook ()
2268 (setq c-basic-offset 6))
2269 (add-hook 'java-mode-hook 'my-java-mode-hook)
2270 @end group
2271 @end example
2272
2273 See @ref{CC Hooks} for more details on the use of @ccmode{} hooks.
2274
2275 @item Styles
2276 A @ccmode{} @dfn{style} is a coherent collection of customizations
2277 with a name. At any time, exactly one style is active in each
2278 @ccmode{} buffer, either the one you have selected or a default.
2279 @ccmode{} is delivered with several existing styles. Additionally,
2280 you can create your own styles, possibly based on these existing
2281 styles. If you worked in a programming team called the ``Free
2282 Group'', which had its own coding standards, you might well have this
2283 in your @file{.emacs} file:
2284
2285 @example
2286 (setq c-default-style '((java-mode . "java")
2287 (awk-mode . "awk")
2288 (other . "free-group-style")))
2289 @end example
2290
2291 See @ref{Styles} for fuller details on using @ccmode{} styles and how
2292 to create them.
2293
2294 @item File Local Variable setting
2295 A @dfn{file local variable setting} is a setting which applies to an
2296 individual source file. You put this in a @dfn{local variables list},
2297 a special block at the end of the source file (@pxref{Specifying File
2298 Variables,,,@emacsman{}}).
2299
2300 @item File Styles
2301 A @dfn{file style} is a rarely used variant of the ``style'' mechanism
2302 described above, which applies to an individual source file.
2303 @xref{File Styles}. You use this by setting certain special variables
2304 in a local variables list (@pxref{Specifying File
2305 Variables,,,@emacsman{}}).
2306
2307 @item Hooks with Styles
2308 For ultimate flexibility, you can use hooks and styles together. For
2309 example, if your team were developing a product which required a
2310 Linux driver, you'd probably want to use the ``linux'' style for the
2311 driver, and your own team's style for the rest of the code. You
2312 could achieve this with code like this in your @file{.emacs}:
2313
2314 @example
2315 @group
2316 (defun my-c-mode-hook ()
2317 (c-set-style
2318 (if (and (buffer-file-name)
2319 (string-match "/usr/src/linux" (buffer-file-name)))
2320 "linux"
2321 "free-group-style")))
2322 (add-hook 'c-mode-hook 'my-c-mode-hook)
2323 @end group
2324 @end example
2325
2326 In a programming team, a hook is a also a good place for each member
2327 to put his own personal preferences. For example, you might be the
2328 only person in your team who likes Auto-newline minor mode. You could
2329 have it enabled by default by placing the following in your
2330 @file{.emacs}:
2331
2332 @example
2333 @group
2334 (defun my-turn-on-auto-newline ()
2335 (c-toggle-auto-newline 1))
2336 (add-hook 'c-mode-common-hook 'my-turn-on-auto-newline)
2337 @end group
2338 @end example
2339 @end table
2340
2341 @menu
2342 * CC Hooks::
2343 * Style Variables::
2344 * Styles::
2345 @end menu
2346
2347 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2348 @node CC Hooks, Style Variables, Config Basics, Config Basics
2349 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2350 @section Hooks
2351 @cindex mode hooks
2352 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2353 @c The node name is "CC Hooks" rather than "Hooks" because of a bug in
2354 @c some older versions of Info, e.g., the info.el in GNU Emacs 21.3.
2355 @c If you go to "Config Basics" and hit <CR> on the xref to "CC
2356 @c Hooks" the function Info-follow-reference searches for "*Note: CC
2357 @c Hooks" from the beginning of the page. If this node were instead
2358 @c named "Hooks", that search would spuriously find "*Note:
2359 @c Hooks(elisp)" and go to the wrong node.
2360
2361 @ccmode{} provides several hooks that you can use to customize the
2362 mode for your coding style. The main hook is
2363 @code{c-mode-common-hook}; typically, you'll put the bulk of your
2364 customizations here. In addition, each language mode has its own
2365 hook, allowing you to fine tune your settings individually for the
2366 different @ccmode{} languages, and there is a package initialization
2367 hook. Finally, there is @code{c-special-indent-hook}, which enables
2368 you to solve anomalous indentation problems. It is described in
2369 @ref{Other Indentation}, not here. All these hooks adhere to the
2370 standard Emacs conventions.
2371
2372 When you open a buffer, @ccmode{} first initializes it with the
2373 currently active style (@pxref{Styles}). Then it calls
2374 @code{c-mode-common-hook}, and finally it calls the language-specific
2375 hook. Thus, any style settings done in these hooks will override
2376 those set by @code{c-default-style}.
2377
2378 @defvar c-initialization-hook
2379 @vindex initialization-hook (c-)
2380 Hook run only once per Emacs session, when @ccmode{} is initialized.
2381 This is a good place to change key bindings (or add new ones) in any
2382 of the @ccmode{} key maps. @xref{Sample Init File}.
2383 @end defvar
2384
2385 @defvar c-mode-common-hook
2386 @vindex mode-common-hook (c-)
2387 Common hook across all languages. It's run immediately before the
2388 language specific hook.
2389 @end defvar
2390
2391 @defvar c-mode-hook
2392 @defvarx c++-mode-hook
2393 @defvarx objc-mode-hook
2394 @defvarx java-mode-hook
2395 @defvarx idl-mode-hook
2396 @defvarx pike-mode-hook
2397 @defvarx awk-mode-hook
2398 The language specific mode hooks. The appropriate one is run as the
2399 last thing when you enter that language mode.
2400 @end defvar
2401
2402 Although these hooks are variables defined in @ccmode{}, you can give
2403 them values before @ccmode{}'s code is loaded---indeed, this is the
2404 only way to use @code{c-initialization-hook}. Their values aren't
2405 overwritten when @ccmode{} gets loaded.
2406
2407 Here's a simplified example of what you can add to your @file{.emacs}
2408 file to do things whenever any @ccmode{} language is edited. See the
2409 Emacs manuals for more information on customizing Emacs via hooks.
2410 @xref{Sample Init File}, for a more complete sample @file{.emacs}
2411 file.
2412
2413 @example
2414 (defun my-c-mode-common-hook ()
2415 ;; my customizations for all of c-mode and related modes
2416 (no-case-fold-search)
2417 )
2418 (add-hook 'c-mode-common-hook 'my-c-mode-common-hook)
2419 @end example
2420
2421 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2422 @node Style Variables, Styles, CC Hooks, Config Basics
2423 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2424 @section Style Variables
2425 @cindex styles
2426 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2427
2428 @cindex style variables
2429 The variables that @ccmode{}'s style system control are called
2430 @dfn{style variables}. Note that style variables are ordinary Lisp
2431 variables, which the style system initializes; you can change their
2432 values at any time (e.g., in a hook function). The style system can
2433 also set other variables, to some extent. @xref{Styles}.
2434
2435 @dfn{Style variables} are handled specially in several ways:
2436
2437 @itemize @bullet
2438 @item
2439 Style variables are by default buffer-local variables. However, they
2440 can instead be made global by setting
2441 @code{c-style-variables-are-local-p} to @code{nil} before @ccmode{} is
2442 initialized.
2443
2444 @item
2445 @vindex c-old-style-variable-behavior
2446 @vindex old-style-variable-behavior (c-)
2447 The default global binding of any style variable (with two exceptions
2448 - see below) is the special symbol @code{set-from-style}. When the
2449 style system initializes a buffer-local copy of a style variable for a
2450 @ccmode{} buffer, if its global binding is still that symbol then it
2451 will be set from the current style. Otherwise it will retain its
2452 global default@footnote{This is a big change from versions of
2453 @ccmode{} earlier than 5.26, where such settings would get overridden
2454 by the style system unless special precautions were taken. That was
2455 changed since it was counterintuitive and confusing, especially to
2456 novice users. If your configuration depends on the old overriding
2457 behavior, you can set the variable
2458 @code{c-old-style-variable-behavior} to non-@code{nil}.}. This
2459 ``otherwise'' happens, for example, when you've set the variable with
2460 @code{setq} at the top level of your @file{.emacs} (@pxref{Config
2461 Basics}).
2462
2463 @item
2464 The style variable @code{c-offsets-alist} (@pxref{c-offsets-alist}) is
2465 an association list with an element for each syntactic symbol. It's
2466 handled a little differently from the other style variables. It's
2467 default global binding is the empty list @code{nil}, rather than
2468 @code{set-from-style}. Before the style system is initialized, you
2469 can add individual elements to @code{c-offsets-alist} by calling
2470 @code{c-set-offset}(@pxref{c-offsets-alist}) just like you would set
2471 other style variables with @code{setq}. Those elements will then
2472 prevail when the style system later initializes a buffer-local copy of
2473 @code{c-offsets-alist}.
2474
2475 @item
2476 The style variable @code{c-special-indent-hook} is also handled in a
2477 special way. Styles can only add functions to this hook, not remove
2478 them, so any global settings you put on it are always
2479 preserved@footnote{This did not change in version 5.26.}. The value
2480 you give this variable in a style definition can be either a function
2481 or a list of functions.
2482
2483 @item
2484 The global bindings of the style variables get captured in the special
2485 @code{user} style when the style system is first initialized.
2486 @xref{Built-in Styles}, for details.
2487 @end itemize
2488
2489 The style variables are:@*
2490 @code{c-indent-comment-alist},
2491 @code{c-indent-comments-syntactically-p} (@pxref{Indentation
2492 Commands});@*
2493 @code{c-doc-comment-style} (@pxref{Doc Comments});@*
2494 @code{c-block-comment-prefix}, @code{c-comment-prefix-regexp}
2495 (@pxref{Custom Filling and Breaking});@*
2496 @code{c-hanging-braces-alist} (@pxref{Hanging Braces});@*
2497 @code{c-hanging-colons-alist} (@pxref{Hanging Colons});@*
2498 @code{c-hanging-semi&comma-criteria} (@pxref{Hanging Semicolons and
2499 Commas});@*
2500 @code{c-cleanup-list} (@pxref{Clean-ups});@*
2501 @code{c-basic-offset} (@pxref{Customizing Indentation});@*
2502 @code{c-offsets-alist} (@pxref{c-offsets-alist});@*
2503 @code{c-comment-only-line-offset} (@pxref{Comment Line-Up});@*
2504 @code{c-special-indent-hook}, @code{c-label-minimum-indentation}
2505 (@pxref{Other Indentation});@*
2506 @code{c-backslash-column}, @code{c-backslash-max-column}
2507 (@pxref{Custom Macros}).
2508
2509 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2510 @node Styles, , Style Variables, Config Basics
2511 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2512 @section Styles
2513 @cindex styles
2514 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2515
2516 By @dfn{style} we mean the layout of the code---things like how many
2517 columns to indent a block of code, whether an opening brace gets
2518 indented to the level of the code it encloses, or of the construct
2519 that introduces it, or ``hangs'' at the end of a line.
2520
2521 Most people only need to edit code formatted in just a few well-defined
2522 and consistent styles. For example, their organization might impose a
2523 ``blessed'' style that all its programmers must conform to. Similarly,
2524 people who work on GNU software will have to use the GNU coding style.
2525 Some shops are more lenient, allowing a variety of coding styles, and as
2526 programmers come and go, there could be a number of styles in use. For
2527 this reason, @ccmode{} makes it convenient for you to set up logical
2528 groupings of customizations called @dfn{styles}, associate a single name
2529 for any particular style, and pretty easily start editing new or
2530 existing code using these styles.
2531
2532 As an alternative to writing a style definition yourself, you can have
2533 @ccmode{} @dfn{guess} (at least part of) your style by looking at an
2534 already formatted piece of your code, @ref{Guessing the Style}.
2535
2536 @menu
2537 * Built-in Styles::
2538 * Choosing a Style::
2539 * Adding Styles::
2540 * Guessing the Style::
2541 * File Styles::
2542 @end menu
2543
2544 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2545 @node Built-in Styles, Choosing a Style, Styles, Styles
2546 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2547 @subsection Built-in Styles
2548 @cindex styles, built-in
2549 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2550
2551 If you're lucky, one of @ccmode{}'s built-in styles might be just
2552 what you're looking for. These are:
2553
2554 @table @code
2555 @item gnu
2556 @cindex GNU style
2557 Coding style blessed by the Free Software Foundation
2558 for C code in GNU programs.
2559
2560 @item k&r
2561 @cindex K&R style
2562 The classic Kernighan and Ritchie style for C code.
2563
2564 @item bsd
2565 @cindex BSD style
2566 Also known as ``Allman style'' after Eric Allman.
2567
2568 @item whitesmith
2569 @cindex Whitesmith style
2570 Popularized by the examples that came with Whitesmiths C, an early
2571 commercial C compiler.
2572
2573 @item stroustrup
2574 @cindex Stroustrup style
2575 The classic Stroustrup style for C++ code.
2576
2577 @item ellemtel
2578 @cindex Ellemtel style
2579 Popular C++ coding standards as defined by ``Programming in C++, Rules
2580 and Recommendations,'' Erik Nyquist and Mats Henricson,
2581 Ellemtel@footnote{This document is available at
2582 @uref{http://www.doc.ic.ac.uk/lab/cplus/c++.rules/} among other
2583 places.}.
2584 @c N.B. This URL was still valid at 2005/8/28 (ACM).
2585
2586 @item linux
2587 @cindex Linux style
2588 C coding standard for Linux (the kernel).
2589
2590 @item python
2591 @cindex Python style
2592 C coding standard for Python extension modules@footnote{Python is a
2593 high level scripting language with a C/C++ foreign function interface.
2594 For more information, see @uref{http://www.python.org/}.}.
2595
2596 @item java
2597 @cindex Java style
2598 The style for editing Java code. Note that the default
2599 value for @code{c-default-style} installs this style when you enter
2600 @code{java-mode}.
2601
2602 @item awk
2603 @cindex AWK style
2604 The style for editing AWK code. Note that the default value for
2605 @code{c-default-style} installs this style when you enter
2606 @code{awk-mode}.
2607
2608 @item user
2609 @cindex User style
2610 This is a special style created by you. It consists of the factory
2611 defaults for all the style variables as modified by the customizations
2612 you do either with the Customization interface or by writing
2613 @code{setq}s and @code{c-set-offset}s at the top level of your
2614 @file{.emacs} file (@pxref{Config Basics}). The style system creates
2615 this style as part of its initialization and doesn't modify it
2616 afterwards.
2617 @end table
2618
2619
2620 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2621 @node Choosing a Style, Adding Styles, Built-in Styles, Styles
2622 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2623 @subsection Choosing a Style
2624 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2625
2626 When you create a new buffer, its style will be set from
2627 @code{c-default-style}. The factory default is the style @code{gnu},
2628 except in Java and AWK modes where it's @code{java} and @code{awk}.
2629
2630 Remember that if you set a style variable with the Customization
2631 interface or at the top level of your @file{.emacs} file before the
2632 style system is initialized (@pxref{Config Basics}), this setting will
2633 override the one that the style system would have given the variable.
2634
2635 To set a buffer's style interactively, use the command @kbd{C-c .}
2636 (@pxref{Other Commands}). To set it from a file's local variable
2637 list, @ref{File Styles}.
2638
2639 @defopt c-default-style
2640 @vindex default-style (c-)
2641 This variable specifies which style to install by default in new
2642 buffers. It takes either a style name string, or an association list
2643 of major mode symbols to style names:
2644
2645 @enumerate
2646 @item
2647 When @code{c-default-style} is a string, it must be an existing style
2648 name. This style is then used for all modes.
2649
2650 @item
2651 When @code{c-default-style} is an association list, the mode language
2652 is looked up to find a style name string.
2653
2654 @item
2655 If @code{c-default-style} is an association list where the mode
2656 language mode isn't found then the special symbol @samp{other} is
2657 looked up. If it's found then the associated style is used.
2658
2659 @item
2660 If @samp{other} is not found then the @samp{gnu} style is used.
2661 @end enumerate
2662
2663 In all cases, the style described in @code{c-default-style} is installed
2664 @emph{before} the language hooks are run, so you can always override
2665 this setting by including an explicit call to @code{c-set-style} in your
2666 language mode hook, or in @code{c-mode-common-hook}.
2667
2668 The standard value of @code{c-default-style} is @w{@code{((java-mode
2669 . "java") (awk-mode . "awk") (other . "gnu"))}}.
2670 @end defopt
2671
2672 @defvar c-indentation-style
2673 @vindex indentation-style (c-)
2674 This variable always contains the buffer's current style name, as a
2675 string.
2676 @end defvar
2677
2678 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2679 @node Adding Styles, Guessing the Style, Choosing a Style, Styles
2680 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2681 @subsection Adding and Amending Styles
2682 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2683
2684 If none of the built-in styles is appropriate, you'll probably want to
2685 create a new @dfn{style definition}, possibly based on an existing
2686 style. To do this, put the new style's settings into a list with the
2687 following format; the list can then be passed as an argument to the
2688 function @code{c-add-style}. You can see an example of a style
2689 definition in @ref{Sample Init File}.
2690
2691 @cindex style definition
2692 @c @defvr {List} style definition
2693 @table @asis
2694 @item Structure of a Style Definition List
2695 ([@var{base-style}] [(@var{variable} . @var{value}) @dots{}])
2696
2697 Optional @var{base-style}, if present, must be a string which is the
2698 name of the @dfn{base style} from which this style inherits. At most
2699 one @var{base-style} is allowed in a style definition. If
2700 @var{base-style} is not specified, the style inherits from the table
2701 of factory default values@footnote{This table is stored internally in
2702 the variable c-fallback-style.} instead. All styles eventually
2703 inherit from this internal table. Style loops generate errors. The
2704 list of pre-existing styles can be seen in @ref{Built-in Styles}.
2705
2706 The dotted pairs (@var{variable} . @var{value}) each consist of a
2707 variable and the value it is to be set to when the style is later
2708 activated.@footnote{Note that if the variable has been given a value
2709 by the Customization interface or a @code{setq} at the top level of
2710 your @file{.emacs}, this value will override the one the style system
2711 tries to give it. @xref{Config Basics}.} The variable can be either a
2712 @ccmode{} style variable or an arbitrary Emacs variable. In the
2713 latter case, it is @emph{not} made buffer-local by the @ccmode{} style
2714 system.
2715 @c @end defvr
2716
2717 Two variables are treated specially in the dotted pair list:
2718
2719 @table @code
2720 @item c-offsets-alist
2721 The value is in turn a list of dotted pairs of the form
2722
2723 @example
2724 (@r{@var{syntactic-symbol}} . @r{@var{offset}})
2725 @end example
2726
2727 as described in @ref{c-offsets-alist}. These are passed to
2728 @code{c-set-offset} so there is no need to set every syntactic symbol
2729 in your style, only those that are different from the inherited style.
2730
2731 @item c-special-indent-hook
2732 The value is added to @code{c-special-indent-hook} using
2733 @code{add-hook}, so any functions already on it are kept. If the value
2734 is a list, each element of the list is added with @code{add-hook}.
2735 @end table
2736 @end table
2737
2738 Styles are kept in the @code{c-style-alist} variable, but you
2739 should never modify this variable directly. Instead, @ccmode{}
2740 provides the function @code{c-add-style} for this purpose.
2741
2742 @defun c-add-style stylename description &optional set-p
2743 @findex add-style (c-)
2744 Add or update a style called @var{stylename}, a string.
2745 @var{description} is the new style definition in the form described
2746 above. If @var{stylename} already exists in @code{c-style-alist} then
2747 it is replaced by @var{description}. (Note, this replacement is
2748 total. The old style is @emph{not} merged into the new one.)
2749 Otherwise, a new style is added.
2750
2751 If the optional @var{set-p} is non-@code{nil} then the new style is
2752 applied to the current buffer as well. The use of this facility is
2753 deprecated and it might be removed from @ccmode{} in a future release.
2754 You should use @code{c-set-style} instead.
2755
2756 The sample @file{.emacs} file provides a concrete example of how a new
2757 style can be added and automatically set. @xref{Sample Init File}.
2758 @end defun
2759
2760 @defvar c-style-alist
2761 @vindex style-alist (c-)
2762 This is the variable that holds the definitions for the styles. It
2763 should not be changed directly; use @code{c-add-style} instead.
2764 @end defvar
2765
2766 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2767 @node Guessing the Style, File Styles, Adding Styles, Styles
2768 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2769 @subsection Guessing the Style
2770 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2771
2772 Instead of specifying a style, you can get @ccmode{} to @dfn{guess}
2773 your style by examining an already formatted code buffer. @ccmode{}
2774 then determines the ''most frequent'' offset (@pxref{c-offsets-alist})
2775 for each of the syntactic symbols (@pxref{Indentation Engine Basics})
2776 encountered in the buffer, and the ''most frequent'' value of
2777 c-basic-offset (@pxref{Customizing Indentation}), then merges the
2778 current style with these ''guesses'' to form a new style. This
2779 combined style is known as the @dfn{guessed style}.
2780
2781 To do this, call @code{c-guess} (or one of the other 5 guessing
2782 commands) on your sample buffer. The analysis of your code may take
2783 some time.
2784
2785 You can then set the guessed style in any @ccmode{} buffer with
2786 @code{c-guess-install}. You can display the style with
2787 @code{c-guess-view}, and preserve it by copying it into your
2788 @file{.emacs} for future use, preferably after editing it.
2789
2790 @table @asis
2791 @item @kbd{M-x c-guess-no-install}
2792 @itemx @kbd{M-x c-guess-buffer-no-install}
2793 @itemx @kbd{M-x c-guess-region-no-install}
2794 @findex c-guess-no-install
2795 @findex c-guess-buffer-no-install
2796 @findex c-guess-region-no-install
2797 @findex guess-no-install (c-)
2798 @findex guess-buffer-no-install (c-)
2799 @findex guess-region-no-install (c-)
2800 These commands analyze a part of the current buffer and guess the
2801 style from it.
2802
2803 The part of the buffer examined is either the region
2804 (@code{c-guess-region-no-install}), the entire buffer
2805 (@code{c-guess-buffer-no-install}), or the first
2806 @code{c-guess-region-max} bytes (@code{c-guess-no-install}).
2807
2808 Each of these commands can be given an optional prefix argument. This
2809 instructs @ccmode{} to combine the new guesses with the current
2810 guesses before forming the guessed style.
2811 @end table
2812
2813 @table @asis
2814 @item @kbd{M-x c-guess}
2815 @itemx @kbd{M-x c-guess-buffer}
2816 @itemx @kbd{M-x c-guess-region}
2817 @findex c-guess
2818 @findex c-guess-buffer
2819 @findex c-guess-region
2820 @findex guess (c-)
2821 @findex guess-buffer (c-)
2822 @findex guess-region (c-)
2823 These commands analyze a part of the current buffer, guess the style
2824 from it, then install the guessed style on the buffer. The guessed
2825 style is given a name based on the buffer's absolute file name, and
2826 you can then set this style on any @ccmode{} buffer with @kbd{C-c .}.
2827
2828 The part of the buffer examined is either the region
2829 (@code{c-guess-region}), the entire buffer (@code{c-guess-buffer}), or
2830 the first @code{c-guess-region-max} bytes (@code{c-guess}).
2831
2832 Each of these commands can be given an optional prefix argument. This
2833 instructs @ccmode{} to combine the new guesses with the current
2834 guesses before forming the guessed style.
2835 @end table
2836
2837 @defopt c-guess-region-max
2838 @vindex guess-region-max (c-)
2839 This variable, default 50000, is the size in bytes of the buffer
2840 portion examined by c-guess and c-guess-no-install. If set to
2841 @code{nil}, the entire buffer is examined.
2842 @end defopt
2843
2844 @defopt c-guess-offset-threshold
2845 @vindex guess-offset-threshold (c-)
2846 This variable, default 10, is the maximum offset, either outwards or
2847 inwards, which will be taken into account by the analysis process.
2848 Any offset bigger than this will be ignored. For no limit, set this
2849 variable to a large number.
2850 @end defopt
2851
2852 @table @asis
2853 @item @kbd{M-x c-guess-install}
2854 @findex c-guess-install
2855 @findex guess-install (c-)
2856
2857 Set the current buffer's style to the guessed style. This prompts you
2858 to enter an optional new style name to give to the guessed style. By
2859 default, this name is based on the buffer's absolute file name. You
2860 can then use this style like any other.
2861
2862 @item @kbd{M-x c-guess-view}
2863 @findex c-guess-view
2864 @findex guess-view (c-)
2865 Display the most recently guessed style in a temporary buffer. This
2866 display is in the form of a @code{c-add-style} form (@pxref{Adding
2867 Styles}) which can be easily copied to your @file{.emacs}. You will
2868 probably want to edit it first.
2869
2870 The display of the guessed style contains these elements:
2871
2872 @table @asis
2873 @item Placeholder Name
2874 You should replace this with a style name of your own.
2875 @item Parent Style
2876 The style current when the guessing began, from which the guessed
2877 style inherits (@pxref{Config Basics}) the settings which weren't
2878 guessed.
2879 @item Guessed Offsets
2880 These are the core result of the guessing process. Each of them is
2881 marked by a comment.
2882 @item Inherited Offsets
2883 These are syntactic offsets which have been taken over from the parent
2884 style. To avoid possible future conflicts, you should remove either
2885 these offsets or the parent style name.
2886 @end table
2887 @end table
2888
2889 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2890 @node File Styles, , Guessing the Style, Styles
2891 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2892 @subsection File Styles
2893 @cindex styles, file local
2894 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2895
2896 @cindex file local variables
2897
2898 The Emacs manual describes how you can customize certain variables on a
2899 per-file basis by including a @dfn{file local variable} block at the end
2900 of the file (@pxref{File Variables,, Local Variables in Files,@emacsman{},
2901 @emacsmantitle{}}).
2902
2903 So far, you've only seen a functional interface for setting styles in
2904 @ccmode{}, and this can't be used here. @ccmode{} fills the gap by
2905 providing two variables for use in a file's local variable list.
2906 Don't use them anywhere else! These allow you to customize the style
2907 on a per-file basis:
2908
2909 @defvar c-file-style
2910 @vindex file-style (c-)
2911 Set this variable to a style name string in the Local Variables list.
2912 From now on, when you visit the file, @ccmode{} will automatically set
2913 the file's style to this one using @code{c-set-style}.
2914 @end defvar
2915
2916 @defvar c-file-offsets
2917 @vindex file-offsets (c-)
2918 Set this variable (in the Local Variables list) to an association list
2919 of the same format as @code{c-offsets-alist}. From now on, when you
2920 visit the file, @ccmode{} will automatically institute these offsets
2921 using @code{c-set-offset}.
2922 @end defvar
2923
2924 Note that file style settings (i.e., @code{c-file-style}) are applied
2925 before file offset settings
2926 (i.e., @code{c-file-offsets})@footnote{Also, if either of these are set
2927 in a file's local variable section, all the style variable values are
2928 made local to that buffer, even if
2929 @code{c-style-variables-are-local-p} is @code{nil}. Since this
2930 variable is virtually always non-@code{nil} anyhow, you're unlikely to
2931 notice this effect.}.
2932
2933 If you set any variable by the file local variables mechanism, that
2934 setting takes priority over all other settings, even those in your
2935 mode hooks (@pxref{CC Hooks}). Any individual setting of a variable
2936 will override one made through @code{c-file-style} or
2937 @code{c-file-offsets}.
2938 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2939 @node Custom Filling and Breaking, Custom Auto-newlines, Config Basics, Top
2940 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2941 @chapter Customizing Filling and Line Breaking
2942 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2943
2944 Since there's a lot of normal text in comments and string literals,
2945 @ccmode{} provides features to edit these like in text mode. It does
2946 this by hooking in on the different line breaking functions and tuning
2947 relevant variables as necessary.
2948
2949 @vindex c-comment-prefix-regexp
2950 @vindex comment-prefix-regexp (c-)
2951 @cindex comment line prefix
2952 @vindex comment-start
2953 @vindex comment-end
2954 @vindex comment-start-skip
2955 @vindex paragraph-start
2956 @vindex paragraph-separate
2957 @vindex paragraph-ignore-fill-prefix
2958 @vindex adaptive-fill-mode
2959 @vindex adaptive-fill-regexp
2960 @vindex adaptive-fill-first-line-regexp
2961 To make Emacs recognize comments and treat text in them as normal
2962 paragraphs, @ccmode{} makes several standard
2963 variables@footnote{@code{comment-start}, @code{comment-end},
2964 @code{comment-start-skip}, @code{paragraph-start},
2965 @code{paragraph-separate}, @code{paragraph-ignore-fill-prefix},
2966 @code{adaptive-fill-mode}, @code{adaptive-fill-regexp}, and
2967 @code{adaptive-fill-first-line-regexp}.} buffer-local and modifies them
2968 according to the language syntax and the comment line prefix.
2969
2970 @defopt c-comment-prefix-regexp
2971 @vindex comment-prefix-regexp (c-)
2972 This style variable contains the regexp used to recognize the
2973 @dfn{comment line prefix}, which is the line decoration that starts
2974 every line in a comment. The variable is either the comment line
2975 prefix itself, or (more usually) an association list with different
2976 values for different languages. The symbol for the major mode is
2977 looked up in the alist to get the regexp for the language, and if it
2978 isn't found then the special symbol @samp{other} is looked up instead.
2979
2980 When a comment line gets divided by @kbd{M-j} or the like, @ccmode{}
2981 inserts the comment line prefix from a neighboring line at the start
2982 of the new line. The default value of c-comment-prefix-regexp is
2983 @samp{//+\\|\\**}, which matches C++ style line comments like
2984
2985 @example
2986 // blah blah
2987 @end example
2988
2989 @noindent
2990 with two or more slashes in front of them, and the second and
2991 subsequent lines of C style block comments like
2992
2993 @example
2994 @group
2995 /*
2996 * blah blah
2997 */
2998 @end group
2999 @end example
3000
3001 @noindent
3002 with zero or more stars at the beginning of every line. If you change
3003 this variable, please make sure it still matches the comment starter
3004 (i.e., @code{//}) of line comments @emph{and} the line prefix inside
3005 block comments.
3006
3007 @findex c-setup-paragraph-variables
3008 @findex setup-paragraph-variables (c-)
3009 Also note that since @ccmode{} uses the value of
3010 @code{c-comment-prefix-regexp} to set up several other variables at
3011 mode initialization, there won't be any effect if you just change it
3012 inside a @ccmode{} buffer. You need to call the command
3013 @code{c-setup-paragraph-variables} too, to update those other
3014 variables. That's also the case if you modify
3015 @code{c-comment-prefix-regexp} in a mode hook, since @ccmode{} will
3016 already have set up these variables before calling the hook.
3017 @end defopt
3018
3019 In comments, @ccmode{} uses @code{c-comment-prefix-regexp} to adapt
3020 the line prefix from the other lines in the comment.
3021
3022 @vindex adaptive-fill-mode
3023 @cindex Adaptive Fill mode
3024 @ccmode{} uses adaptive fill mode (@pxref{Adaptive Fill,,, emacs, GNU
3025 Emacs Manual}) to make Emacs correctly keep the line prefix when
3026 filling paragraphs. That also makes Emacs preserve the text
3027 indentation @emph{inside} the comment line prefix. E.g., in the
3028 following comment, both paragraphs will be filled with the left
3029 margins of the texts kept intact:
3030
3031 @example
3032 @group
3033 /* Make a balanced b-tree of the nodes in the incoming
3034 * stream. But, to quote the famous words of Donald E.
3035 * Knuth,
3036 *
3037 * Beware of bugs in the above code; I have only
3038 * proved it correct, not tried it.
3039 */
3040 @end group
3041 @end example
3042
3043 @findex c-setup-filladapt
3044 @findex setup-filladapt (c-)
3045 @findex filladapt-mode
3046 @vindex filladapt-mode
3047 @cindex Filladapt mode
3048 It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages, notably Kyle
3049 E. Jones' Filladapt package@footnote{It's available from
3050 @uref{http://www.wonderworks.com/}. As of version 2.12, it does however
3051 lack a feature that makes it work suboptimally when
3052 @code{c-comment-prefix-regexp} matches the empty string (which it does
3053 by default). A patch for that is available from
3054 @uref{http://cc-mode.sourceforge.net/,, the CC Mode web site}.},
3055 @c 2005/11/22: The above is still believed to be the case.
3056 which handles things like bulleted lists nicely. There's a convenience
3057 function @code{c-setup-filladapt} that tunes the relevant variables in
3058 Filladapt for use in @ccmode{}. Call it from a mode hook, e.g., with
3059 something like this in your @file{.emacs}:
3060
3061 @example
3062 (defun my-c-mode-common-hook ()
3063 (c-setup-filladapt)
3064 (filladapt-mode 1))
3065 (add-hook 'c-mode-common-hook 'my-c-mode-common-hook)
3066 @end example
3067
3068 @defopt c-block-comment-prefix
3069 @vindex block-comment-prefix (c-)
3070 @vindex c-comment-continuation-stars
3071 @vindex comment-continuation-stars (c-)
3072 Normally the comment line prefix inserted for a new line inside a
3073 comment is deduced from other lines in it. However there's one
3074 situation when there's no hint about what the prefix should look like,
3075 namely when a block comment is broken for the first time. This style
3076 variable@footnote{In versions before 5.26, this variable was called
3077 @code{c-comment-continuation-stars}. As a compatibility measure,
3078 @ccmode{} still uses the value on that variable if it's set.} is used
3079 then as the comment prefix. It defaults to @samp{*
3080 }@footnote{Actually, this default setting of
3081 @code{c-block-comment-prefix} typically gets overridden by the default
3082 style @code{gnu}, which sets it to blank. You can see the line
3083 splitting effect described here by setting a different style,
3084 e.g., @code{k&r} @xref{Choosing a Style}.}, which makes a comment
3085
3086 @example
3087 /* Got O(n^2) here, which is a Bad Thing. */
3088 @end example
3089
3090 @noindent
3091 break into
3092
3093 @example
3094 @group
3095 /* Got O(n^2) here, which
3096 * is a Bad Thing. */
3097 @end group
3098 @end example
3099
3100 Note that it won't work to adjust the indentation by putting leading
3101 spaces in @code{c-block-comment-prefix}, since @ccmode{} still uses the
3102 normal indentation engine to indent the line. Thus, the right way to
3103 fix the indentation is by customizing the @code{c} syntactic symbol. It
3104 defaults to @code{c-lineup-C-comments}, which handles the indentation of
3105 most common comment styles, see @ref{Line-Up Functions}.
3106 @end defopt
3107
3108 @defopt c-ignore-auto-fill
3109 @vindex ignore-auto-fill (c-)
3110 When auto fill mode is enabled, @ccmode{} can selectively ignore it
3111 depending on the context the line break would occur in, e.g., to never
3112 break a line automatically inside a string literal. This variable
3113 takes a list of symbols for the different contexts where auto-filling
3114 never should occur:
3115
3116 @table @code
3117 @item string
3118 Inside a string or character literal.
3119 @item c
3120 Inside a C style block comment.
3121 @item c++
3122 Inside a C++ style line comment.
3123 @item cpp
3124 Inside a preprocessor directive.
3125 @item code
3126 Anywhere else, i.e., in normal code.
3127 @end table
3128
3129 By default, @code{c-ignore-auto-fill} is set to @code{(string cpp
3130 code)}, which means that when auto-fill mode is activated,
3131 auto-filling only occurs in comments. In literals, it's often
3132 desirable to have explicit control over newlines. In preprocessor
3133 directives, the necessary @samp{\} escape character before the newline
3134 is not automatically inserted, so an automatic line break would
3135 produce invalid code. In normal code, line breaks are normally
3136 dictated by some logical structure in the code rather than the last
3137 whitespace character, so automatic line breaks there will produce poor
3138 results in the current implementation.
3139 @end defopt
3140
3141 @vindex comment-multi-line
3142 If inside a comment and @code{comment-multi-line} (@pxref{Auto
3143 Fill,,,@emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}} is non-@code{nil}, the
3144 indentation and
3145 line prefix are preserved. If inside a comment and
3146 @code{comment-multi-line} is @code{nil}, a new comment of the same
3147 type is started on the next line and indented as appropriate for
3148 comments.
3149
3150 Note that @ccmode{} sets @code{comment-multi-line} to @code{t} at
3151 startup. The reason is that @kbd{M-j} could otherwise produce sequences
3152 of single line block comments for texts that should logically be treated
3153 as one comment, and the rest of the paragraph handling code
3154 (e.g., @kbd{M-q} and @kbd{M-a}) can't cope with that, which would lead to
3155 inconsistent behavior.
3156
3157 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3158 @node Custom Auto-newlines, Clean-ups, Custom Filling and Breaking, Top
3159 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3160 @chapter Customizing Auto-newlines
3161 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3162
3163 @ccmode{} determines whether to insert auto-newlines in two basically
3164 different ways, depending on the character just typed:
3165
3166 @table @asis
3167 @item Braces and Colons
3168 @ccmode{} first determines the syntactic context of the brace or colon
3169 (@pxref{Syntactic Symbols}), then looks for a corresponding element in
3170 an alist. This element specifies where to put newlines: this is any
3171 combination of before and after the brace or colon. If no alist
3172 element is found, newlines are inserted both before and after a brace,
3173 but none are inserted around a colon. See @ref{Hanging Braces} and
3174 @ref{Hanging Colons}.
3175
3176 @item Semicolons and Commas
3177 The variable @code{c-hanging-semi&comma-criteria} contains a list of
3178 functions which determine whether to insert a newline after a newly
3179 typed semicolon or comma. @xref{Hanging Semicolons and Commas}.
3180 @end table
3181
3182 The names of these configuration variables contain @samp{hanging}
3183 because they let you @dfn{hang} the pertinent characters. A character
3184 which introduces a C construct is said to @dfn{hang on the right} when
3185 it appears at the end of a line after other code, being separated by a
3186 line break from the construct it introduces, like the opening brace in:
3187
3188 @example
3189 @group
3190 while (i < MAX) @{
3191 total += entry[i];
3192 entry [i++] = 0;
3193 @}
3194 @end group
3195 @end example
3196
3197 @noindent
3198 A character @dfn{hangs on the left} when it appears at the start of
3199 the line after the construct it closes off, like the above closing
3200 brace.
3201
3202 The next chapter, ``Clean-ups'', describes how to configure @ccmode{}
3203 to remove these automatically added newlines in certain specific
3204 circumstances. @xref{Clean-ups}.
3205
3206 @menu
3207 * Hanging Braces::
3208 * Hanging Colons::
3209 * Hanging Semicolons and Commas::
3210 @end menu
3211
3212
3213 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3214 @node Hanging Braces, Hanging Colons, Custom Auto-newlines, Custom Auto-newlines
3215 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3216 @section Hanging Braces
3217 @cindex hanging braces
3218 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3219
3220 To specify which kinds of braces you want auto-newlines put around,
3221 you set the style variable @code{c-hanging-braces-alist}. Its
3222 structure and semantics are described in this section. Details of how
3223 to set it up, and its relationship to CC Mode's style system are given
3224 in @ref{Style Variables}.
3225
3226 Say you wanted an auto-newline after (but not before) the following
3227 @samp{@{}:
3228
3229 @example
3230 if (foo < 17) @{
3231 @end example
3232
3233 @noindent
3234 First you need to find the @dfn{syntactic context} of the brace---type
3235 a @key{RET} before the brace to get it on a line of its
3236 own@footnote{Also insert a @samp{\} at the end of the previous line if
3237 you're in AWK Mode.}, then type @kbd{C-c C-s}. That will tell you
3238 something like:
3239
3240 @example
3241 ((substatement-open 1061))
3242 @end example
3243
3244 @noindent
3245 So here you need to put the entry @code{(substatement-open . (after))}
3246 into @code{c-hanging-braces-alist}.
3247
3248 If you don't want any auto-newlines for a particular syntactic symbol,
3249 put this into @code{c-hanging-braces-alist}:
3250
3251 @example
3252 (brace-entry-open)
3253 @end example
3254
3255 If some brace syntactic symbol is not in @code{c-hanging-brace-alist},
3256 its entry is taken by default as @code{(before after)}---insert a
3257 newline both before and after the brace. In place of a
3258 ``before/after'' list you can specify a function in this alist---this
3259 is useful when the auto newlines depend on the code around the brace.
3260
3261 @defopt c-hanging-braces-alist
3262 @vindex hanging-braces-alist (c-)
3263
3264 This variable is an association list which maps syntactic symbols to
3265 lists of places to insert a newline. @xref{Association
3266 Lists,,,@lispref{}, @lispreftitle{}}. The key of each element is the
3267 syntactic symbol, the associated value is either @code{nil}, a list,
3268 or a function.
3269
3270 @table @asis
3271 @item The Key: the syntactic symbol
3272 The syntactic symbols that are useful as keys in this list are
3273 @code{brace-list-intro}, @code{statement-cont},
3274 @code{inexpr-class-open}, @code{inexpr-class-close}, and all the
3275 @code{*-open} and @code{*-close} symbols. @xref{Syntactic Symbols},
3276 for a more detailed description of these syntactic symbols, except for
3277 @code{inexpr-class-open} and @code{inexpr-class-close}, which aren't
3278 actual syntactic symbols. Elements with any other value as a key get
3279 ignored.
3280
3281 The braces of anonymous inner classes in Java are given the special
3282 symbols @code{inexpr-class-open} and @code{inexpr-class-close}, so that
3283 they can be distinguished from the braces of normal classes@footnote{The
3284 braces of anonymous classes produce a combination of
3285 @code{inexpr-class}, and @code{class-open} or @code{class-close} in
3286 normal indentation analysis.}.
3287
3288 Note that the aggregate constructs in Pike mode, @samp{(@{}, @samp{@})},
3289 @samp{([}, @samp{])}, and @samp{(<}, @samp{>)}, do not count as brace
3290 lists in this regard, even though they do for normal indentation
3291 purposes. It's currently not possible to set automatic newlines on
3292 these constructs.
3293
3294 @item The associated value: the ``ACTION'' list or function
3295 The value associated with each syntactic symbol in this association
3296 list is called an @var{action}, which can be either a list or a
3297 function which returns a list. @xref{Custom Braces}, for how to use
3298 a function as a brace hanging @var{action}.
3299
3300 The list @var{action} (or the list returned by @var{action} when it's
3301 a function) contains some combination of the symbols @code{before} and
3302 @code{after}, directing @ccmode{} where to put newlines in
3303 relationship to the brace being inserted. Thus, if the list contains
3304 only the symbol @code{after}, then the brace hangs on the right side
3305 of the line, as in:
3306
3307 @example
3308 // here, open braces always `hang'
3309 void spam( int i ) @{
3310 if( i == 7 ) @{
3311 dosomething(i);
3312 @}
3313 @}
3314 @end example
3315
3316 When the list contains both @code{after} and @code{before}, the braces
3317 will appear on a line by themselves, as shown by the close braces in
3318 the above example. The list can also be empty, in which case newlines
3319 are added neither before nor after the brace.
3320 @end table
3321
3322 If a syntactic symbol is missing entirely from
3323 @code{c-hanging-braces-alist}, it's treated in the same way as an
3324 @var{action} with a list containing @code{before} and @code{after}, so
3325 that braces by default end up on their own line.
3326
3327 For example, the default value of @code{c-hanging-braces-alist} is:
3328
3329 @example
3330 ((brace-list-open)
3331 (brace-entry-open)
3332 (statement-cont)
3333 (substatement-open after)
3334 (block-close . c-snug-do-while)
3335 (extern-lang-open after)
3336 (namespace-open after)
3337 (module-open after)
3338 (composition-open after)
3339 (inexpr-class-open after)
3340 (inexpr-class-close before))
3341 @end example
3342
3343 @noindent which says that @code{brace-list-open},
3344 @code{brace-entry-open} and @code{statement-cont}@footnote{Brace lists
3345 inside statements, such as initializers for static array variables
3346 inside functions in C, are recognized as @code{statement-cont}. All
3347 normal substatement blocks are recognized with other symbols.} braces
3348 should both hang on the right side and allow subsequent text to follow
3349 on the same line as the brace. Also, @code{substatement-open},
3350 @code{extern-lang-open}, and @code{inexpr-class-open} braces should hang
3351 on the right side, but subsequent text should follow on the next line.
3352 The opposite holds for @code{inexpr-class-close} braces; they won't
3353 hang, but the following text continues on the same line. Here, in the
3354 @code{block-close} entry, you also see an example of using a function as
3355 an @var{action}. In all other cases, braces are put on a line by
3356 themselves.
3357 @end defopt
3358
3359 @menu
3360 * Custom Braces::
3361 @end menu
3362
3363 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3364 @node Custom Braces, , Hanging Braces, Hanging Braces
3365 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3366 @subsection Custom Brace Hanging
3367 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3368
3369 @vindex c-hanging-braces-alist
3370 @vindex hanging-braces-alist (c-)
3371 @cindex action functions
3372 Syntactic symbols aren't the only place where you can customize
3373 @ccmode{} with the lisp equivalent of callback functions. Remember
3374 that @var{action}s are usually a list containing some combination of
3375 the symbols @code{before} and @code{after} (@pxref{Hanging Braces}).
3376 For more flexibility, you can instead specify brace ``hanginess'' by
3377 giving a syntactic symbol an @dfn{action function} in
3378 @code{c-hanging-braces-alist}; this function determines the
3379 ``hanginess'' of a brace, usually by looking at the code near it.
3380
3381 @cindex customization, brace hanging
3382 An action function is called with two arguments: the syntactic symbol
3383 for the brace (e.g., @code{substatement-open}), and the buffer position
3384 where the brace has been inserted. Point is undefined on entry to an
3385 action function, but the function must preserve it (e.g., by using
3386 @code{save-excursion}). The return value should be a list containing
3387 some combination of @code{before} and @code{after}, including neither
3388 of them (i.e., @code{nil}).
3389
3390 @defvar c-syntactic-context
3391 @vindex syntactic-context (c-)
3392 During the call to the indentation or brace hanging @var{action}
3393 function, this variable is bound to the full syntactic analysis list.
3394 This might be, for example, @samp{((block-close 73))}. Don't ever
3395 give @code{c-syntactic-context} a value yourself---this would disrupt
3396 the proper functioning of @ccmode{}.
3397
3398 This variable is also bound in three other circumstances:
3399 (i)@w{ }when calling a c-hanging-semi&comma-criteria function
3400 (@pxref{Hanging Semicolons and Commas}); (ii)@w{ }when calling a
3401 line-up function (@pxref{Custom Line-Up}); (iii)@w{ }when calling a
3402 c-special-indent-hook function (@pxref{Other Indentation}).
3403 @end defvar
3404
3405 As an example, @ccmode{} itself uses this feature to dynamically
3406 determine the hanginess of braces which close ``do-while''
3407 constructs:
3408
3409 @example
3410 void do_list( int count, char** atleast_one_string )
3411 @{
3412 int i=0;
3413 do @{
3414 handle_string( atleast_one_string[i] );
3415 i++;
3416 @} while( i < count );
3417 @}
3418 @end example
3419
3420 @ccmode{} assigns the @code{block-close} syntactic symbol to the
3421 brace that closes the @code{do} construct, and normally we'd like the
3422 line that follows a @code{block-close} brace to begin on a separate
3423 line. However, with ``do-while'' constructs, we want the
3424 @code{while} clause to follow the closing brace. To do this, we
3425 associate the @code{block-close} symbol with the @var{action} function
3426 @code{c-snug-do-while}:
3427
3428 @example
3429 (defun c-snug-do-while (syntax pos)
3430 "Dynamically calculate brace hanginess for do-while statements."
3431 (save-excursion
3432 (let (langelem)
3433 (if (and (eq syntax 'block-close)
3434 (setq langelem (assq 'block-close c-syntactic-context))
3435 (progn (goto-char (cdr langelem))
3436 (if (= (following-char) ?@{)
3437 (forward-sexp -1))
3438 (looking-at "\\<do\\>[^_]")))
3439 '(before)
3440 '(before after)))))
3441 @end example
3442
3443 @findex c-snug-do-while
3444 @findex snug-do-while (c-)
3445 This function simply looks to see if the brace closes a ``do-while''
3446 clause and if so, returns the list @samp{(before)} indicating
3447 that a newline should be inserted before the brace, but not after it.
3448 In all other cases, it returns the list @samp{(before after)} so
3449 that the brace appears on a line by itself.
3450
3451 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3452 @node Hanging Colons, Hanging Semicolons and Commas, Hanging Braces, Custom Auto-newlines
3453 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3454 @section Hanging Colons
3455 @cindex hanging colons
3456 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3457
3458 @cindex customization, colon hanging
3459 @vindex c-hanging-colons-alist
3460 @vindex hanging-colons-alist (c-)
3461
3462 Using a mechanism similar to brace hanging (@pxref{Hanging Braces}),
3463 colons can also be made to hang using the style variable
3464 @code{c-hanging-colons-alist}: when a colon is typed, @ccmode
3465 determines its syntactic context, looks this up in the alist
3466 @code{c-changing-colons-alist} and inserts up to two newlines
3467 accordingly. Here, however, If @ccmode fails to find an entry for a
3468 syntactic symbol in the alist, no newlines are inserted around the
3469 newly typed colon.
3470
3471 @defopt c-hanging-colons-alist
3472 @vindex hanging-colons-alist (c-)
3473
3474 @table @asis
3475 @item The Key: the syntactic symbol
3476 The syntactic symbols appropriate as keys in this association list
3477 are: @code{case-label}, @code{label}, @code{access-label},
3478 @code{member-init-intro}, and @code{inher-intro}. @xref{Syntactic
3479 Symbols}. Elements with any other value as a key get ignored.
3480
3481 @item The associated value: the ``ACTION'' list
3482 The @var{action} here is simply a list containing a combination of the
3483 symbols @code{before} and @code{after}. Unlike in
3484 @code{c-hanging-braces-alist}, functions as @var{actions} are not
3485 supported; there doesn't seem to be any need for them.
3486 @end table
3487 @end defopt
3488
3489 In C++, double-colons are used as a scope operator but because these
3490 colons always appear right next to each other, newlines before and after
3491 them are controlled by a different mechanism, called @dfn{clean-ups} in
3492 @ccmode{}. @xref{Clean-ups}, for details.
3493
3494 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3495 @node Hanging Semicolons and Commas, , Hanging Colons, Custom Auto-newlines
3496 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3497 @section Hanging Semicolons and Commas
3498 @cindex hanging semicolons
3499 @cindex hanging commas
3500 @cindex customization, semicolon newlines
3501 @cindex customization, comma newlines
3502 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3503
3504 @defopt c-hanging-semi&comma-criteria
3505 @vindex hanging-semi&comma-criteria (c-)
3506 This style variable takes a list of functions; these get called when
3507 you type a semicolon or comma. The functions are called in order
3508 without arguments. When these functions are entered, point is just
3509 after the newly inserted @samp{;} or @samp{,} and they must preserve
3510 point (e.g., by using @code{save-excursion}). During the call, the
3511 variable @code{c-syntactic-context} is bound to the syntactic context
3512 of the current line@footnote{This was first introduced in @ccmode{}
3513 5.31.} @pxref{Custom Braces}. These functions don't insert newlines
3514 themselves, rather they direct @ccmode{} whether or not to do so.
3515 They should return one of the following values:
3516
3517 @table @code
3518 @item t
3519 A newline is to be inserted after the @samp{;} or @samp{,}, and no
3520 more functions from the list are to be called.
3521 @item stop
3522 No more functions from the list are to be called, and no newline is to
3523 be inserted.
3524 @item nil
3525 No determination has been made, and the next function in the list is
3526 to be called.
3527 @end table
3528
3529 Note that auto-newlines are never inserted @emph{before} a semicolon
3530 or comma. If every function in the list is called without a
3531 determination being made, then no newline is added.
3532
3533 In AWK mode, this variable is set by default to @code{nil}. In the
3534 other modes, the default value is a list containing a single function,
3535 @code{c-semi&comma-inside-parenlist}. This inserts newlines after all
3536 semicolons, apart from those separating @code{for}-clause statements.
3537 @end defopt
3538
3539 @defun c-semi&comma-no-newlines-before-nonblanks
3540 @findex semi&comma-no-newlines-before-nonblanks (c-)
3541 This is an example of a criteria function, provided by @ccmode{}. It
3542 prevents newlines from being inserted after semicolons when there is a
3543 non-blank following line. Otherwise, it makes no determination. To
3544 use, add this function to the front of the
3545 @code{c-hanging-semi&comma-criteria} list.
3546
3547 @example
3548 (defun c-semi&comma-no-newlines-before-nonblanks ()
3549 (save-excursion
3550 (if (and (eq last-command-char ?\;)
3551 (zerop (forward-line 1))
3552 (not (looking-at "^[ \t]*$")))
3553 'stop
3554 nil)))
3555 @end example
3556 @end defun
3557
3558 @defun c-semi&comma-inside-parenlist
3559 @findex semi&comma-inside-parenlist (c-)
3560 @defunx c-semi&comma-no-newlines-for-oneline-inliners
3561 @findex semi&comma-no-newlines-for-oneline-inliners (c-)
3562 The function @code{c-semi&comma-inside-parenlist} is what prevents
3563 newlines from being inserted inside the parenthesis list of @code{for}
3564 statements. In addition to
3565 @code{c-semi&comma-no-newlines-before-nonblanks} described above,
3566 @ccmode{} also comes with the criteria function
3567 @code{c-semi&comma-no-newlines-for-oneline-inliners}, which suppresses
3568 newlines after semicolons inside one-line inline method definitions
3569 (e.g., in C++ or Java).
3570 @end defun
3571
3572
3573 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3574 @node Clean-ups, Indentation Engine Basics, Custom Auto-newlines, Top
3575 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3576 @chapter Clean-ups
3577 @cindex clean-ups
3578 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3579
3580 @dfn{Clean-ups} are mechanisms which remove (or exceptionally, add)
3581 whitespace in specific circumstances and are complementary to colon
3582 and brace hanging. You enable a clean-up by adding its symbol into
3583 @code{c-cleanup-list}, e.g., like this:
3584
3585 @example
3586 (add-to-list 'c-cleanup-list 'space-before-funcall)
3587 @end example
3588
3589 On the surface, it would seem that clean-ups overlap the functionality
3590 provided by the @code{c-hanging-*-alist} variables. Clean-ups,
3591 however, are used to adjust code ``after-the-fact'', i.e., to adjust
3592 the whitespace in constructs later than when they were typed.
3593
3594 Most of the clean-ups remove automatically inserted newlines, and are
3595 only active when auto-newline minor mode is turned on. Others will
3596 work all the time. Note that clean-ups are only performed when there
3597 is nothing but whitespace appearing between the individual components
3598 of the construct, and (apart from @code{comment-close-slash}) when the
3599 construct does not occur within a literal (@pxref{Auto-newlines}).
3600
3601 @defopt c-cleanup-list
3602 @vindex cleanup-list (c-)
3603 @cindex literal
3604
3605 You configure @ccmode{}'s clean-ups by setting the style variable
3606 @code{c-cleanup-list}, which is a list of clean-up symbols. By
3607 default, @ccmode{} cleans up only the @code{scope-operator} construct,
3608 which is necessary for proper C++ support.
3609 @end defopt
3610
3611 These are the clean-ups that are only active when electric and
3612 auto-newline minor modes are enabled:
3613
3614 @c TBD: Would like to use some sort of @deffoo here; @table indents a
3615 @c bit too much in dvi output.
3616 @table @code
3617 @item brace-else-brace
3618 Clean up @samp{@} else @{} constructs by placing the entire construct on
3619 a single line. Clean up occurs when the open brace after the
3620 @samp{else} is typed. So for example, this:
3621
3622 @example
3623 @group
3624 void spam(int i)
3625 @{
3626 if( i==7 ) @{
3627 dosomething();
3628 @}
3629 else
3630 @{
3631 @end group
3632 @end example
3633
3634 @noindent
3635 appears like this after the last open brace is typed:
3636
3637 @example
3638 @group
3639 void spam(int i)
3640 @{
3641 if( i==7 ) @{
3642 dosomething();
3643 @} else @{
3644 @end group
3645 @end example
3646
3647 @item brace-elseif-brace
3648 Similar to the @code{brace-else-brace} clean-up, but this cleans up
3649 @samp{@} else if (...) @{} constructs. For example:
3650
3651 @example
3652 @group
3653 void spam(int i)
3654 @{
3655 if( i==7 ) @{
3656 dosomething();
3657 @}
3658 else if( i==3 )
3659 @{
3660 @end group
3661 @end example
3662
3663 @noindent
3664 appears like this after the last open parenthesis is typed:
3665
3666 @example
3667 @group
3668 void spam(int i)
3669 @{
3670 if( i==7 ) @{
3671 dosomething();
3672 @} else if(
3673 @end group
3674 @end example
3675
3676 @noindent
3677 and like this after the last open brace is typed:
3678
3679 @example
3680 @group
3681 void spam(int i)
3682 @{
3683 if( i==7 ) @{
3684 dosomething();
3685 @} else if( i==3 ) @{
3686 @end group
3687 @end example
3688
3689 @item brace-catch-brace
3690 Analogous to @code{brace-elseif-brace}, but cleans up @samp{@} catch
3691 (...) @{} in C++ and Java mode.
3692
3693 @item empty-defun-braces
3694 Clean up braces following a top-level function or class definition that
3695 contains no body. Clean up occurs when the closing brace is typed.
3696 Thus the following:
3697
3698 @example
3699 @group
3700 class Spam
3701 @{
3702 @}
3703 @end group
3704 @end example
3705
3706 @noindent
3707 is transformed into this when the close brace is typed:
3708
3709 @example
3710 @group
3711 class Spam
3712 @{@}
3713 @end group
3714 @end example
3715
3716 @item defun-close-semi
3717 Clean up the terminating semicolon on top-level function or class
3718 definitions when they follow a close brace. Clean up occurs when the
3719 semicolon is typed. So for example, the following:
3720
3721 @example
3722 @group
3723 class Spam
3724 @{
3725 ...
3726 @}
3727 ;
3728 @end group
3729 @end example
3730
3731 @noindent
3732 is transformed into this when the semicolon is typed:
3733
3734 @example
3735 @group
3736 class Spam
3737 @{
3738 ...
3739 @};
3740 @end group
3741 @end example
3742
3743 @item list-close-comma
3744 Clean up commas following braces in array and aggregate initializers.
3745 Clean up occurs when the comma is typed. The space before the comma
3746 is zapped just like the space before the semicolon in
3747 @code{defun-close-semi}.
3748
3749 @item scope-operator
3750 Clean up double colons which might designate a C++ scope operator split
3751 across multiple lines@footnote{Certain C++ constructs introduce
3752 ambiguous situations, so @code{scope-operator} clean-ups might not
3753 always be correct. This usually only occurs when scoped identifiers
3754 appear in switch label tags.}. Clean up occurs when the second colon is
3755 typed. You will always want @code{scope-operator} in the
3756 @code{c-cleanup-list} when you are editing C++ code.
3757
3758 @item one-liner-defun
3759 Clean up a single line of code enclosed by defun braces by removing
3760 the whitespace before and after the code. The clean-up happens when
3761 the closing brace is typed. If the variable
3762 @code{c-max-one-liner-length} is set, the cleanup is only done if the
3763 resulting line would be no longer than the value of that variable.
3764
3765 For example, consider this AWK code:
3766
3767 @example
3768 @group
3769 BEGIN @{
3770 FS = "\t" # use <TAB> as a field separator
3771 @}
3772 @end group
3773 @end example
3774
3775 @noindent
3776 It gets compacted to the following when the closing brace is typed:
3777
3778 @example
3779 @group
3780 BEGIN @{FS = "\t"@} # use <TAB> as a field separator
3781 @end group
3782 @end example
3783
3784 @defopt c-max-one-liner-length
3785 @vindex max-one-liner-length (c-)
3786 The maximum length of the resulting line for which the clean-up
3787 @code{one-liner-defun} will be triggered. This length is that of the entire
3788 line, including any leading whitespace and any trailing comment. Its
3789 default value is 80. If the value is zero or @code{nil}, no limit
3790 applies.
3791 @end defopt
3792 @end table
3793
3794 The following clean-ups are always active when they occur on
3795 @code{c-cleanup-list}, regardless of whether Electric minor mode or
3796 Auto-newline minor mode are enabled:
3797
3798 @table @code
3799 @item space-before-funcall
3800 Insert a space between the function name and the opening parenthesis
3801 of a function call. This produces function calls in the style
3802 mandated by the GNU coding standards, e.g., @samp{signal@w{ }(SIGINT,
3803 SIG_IGN)} and @samp{abort@w{ }()}. Clean up occurs when the opening
3804 parenthesis is typed. This clean-up should never be active in AWK
3805 Mode, since such a space is syntactically invalid for user defined
3806 functions.
3807
3808 @item compact-empty-funcall
3809 Clean up any space between the function name and the opening parenthesis
3810 of a function call that has no arguments. This is typically used
3811 together with @code{space-before-funcall} if you prefer the GNU function
3812 call style for functions with arguments but think it looks ugly when
3813 it's only an empty parenthesis pair. I.e., you will get @samp{signal
3814 (SIGINT, SIG_IGN)}, but @samp{abort()}. Clean up occurs when the
3815 closing parenthesis is typed.
3816
3817 @item comment-close-slash
3818 When inside a block comment, terminate the comment when you type a slash
3819 at the beginning of a line (i.e., immediately after the comment prefix).
3820 This clean-up removes whitespace preceding the slash and if needed,
3821 inserts a star to complete the token @samp{*/}. Type @kbd{C-q /} in this
3822 situation if you just want a literal @samp{/} inserted.
3823 @end table
3824
3825
3826 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3827 @node Indentation Engine Basics, Customizing Indentation, Clean-ups, Top
3828 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3829 @chapter Indentation Engine Basics
3830 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3831
3832 This chapter will briefly cover how @ccmode{} indents lines of code.
3833 It is helpful to understand the indentation model being used so that
3834 you will know how to customize @ccmode{} for your personal coding
3835 style. All the details are in @ref{Customizing Indentation}.
3836
3837 @ccmode{} has an indentation engine that provides a flexible and
3838 general mechanism for customizing indentation. When @ccmode{} indents
3839 a line of code, it separates its calculations into two steps:
3840
3841 @enumerate
3842 @item
3843 @cindex syntactic symbol
3844 @cindex anchor position
3845 It analyzes the line to determine its @dfn{syntactic symbol(s)} (the
3846 kind of language construct it's looking at) and its @dfn{anchor
3847 position} (the position earlier in the file that @ccmode{} will indent
3848 the line relative to). The anchor position might be the location of
3849 an opening brace in the previous line, for example. @xref{Syntactic
3850 Analysis}.
3851 @item
3852 @cindex offsets
3853 @cindex indentation offset specifications
3854 It looks up the syntactic symbol(s) in the configuration to get the
3855 corresponding @dfn{offset(s)}. The symbol @code{+}, which means
3856 ``indent this line one more level'' is a typical offset. @ccmode{}
3857 then applies these offset(s) to the anchor position, giving the
3858 indentation for the line. The different sorts of offsets are
3859 described in @ref{c-offsets-alist}.
3860 @end enumerate
3861
3862 In exceptional circumstances, the syntax directed indentation
3863 described here may be a nuisance rather than a help. You can disable
3864 it by setting @code{c-syntactic-indentation} to @code{nil}. (To set
3865 the variable interactively, @ref{Minor Modes}).
3866
3867 @defopt c-syntactic-indentation
3868 @vindex syntactic-indentation (c-)
3869 When this is non-@code{nil} (which it is by default), the indentation
3870 of code is done according to its syntactic structure. When it's
3871 @code{nil}, every line is just indented to the same level as the
3872 previous one, and @kbd{TAB} (@code{c-indent-command}) adjusts the
3873 indentation in steps of @code{c-basic-offset}. The current style
3874 (@pxref{Config Basics}) then has no effect on indentation, nor do any
3875 of the variables associated with indentation, not even
3876 @code{c-special-indent-hook}.
3877 @end defopt
3878
3879 @menu
3880 * Syntactic Analysis::
3881 * Syntactic Symbols::
3882 * Indentation Calculation::
3883 @end menu
3884
3885
3886 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3887 @node Syntactic Analysis, Syntactic Symbols, Indentation Engine Basics, Indentation Engine Basics
3888 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3889 @section Syntactic Analysis
3890 @cindex syntactic analysis
3891 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3892
3893 @cindex syntactic element
3894 @cindex syntactic context
3895 The first thing @ccmode{} does when indenting a line of code, is to
3896 analyze the line, determining the @dfn{syntactic context} of the
3897 (first) construct on that line. It's a list of @dfn{syntactic
3898 elements}, where each syntactic element in turn is a list@footnote{In
3899 @ccmode 5.28 and earlier, a syntactic element was a dotted pair; the
3900 cons was the syntactic symbol and the cdr was the anchor position.
3901 For compatibility's sake, the parameter passed to a line-up function
3902 still has this dotted pair form (@pxref{Custom Line-Up}).} Here is a
3903 brief and typical example:
3904
3905 @example
3906 ((defun-block-intro 1959))
3907 @end example
3908
3909 @cindex syntactic symbol
3910 @noindent
3911 The first thing inside each syntactic element is always a
3912 @dfn{syntactic symbol}. It describes the kind of construct that was
3913 recognized, e.g., @code{statement}, @code{substatement},
3914 @code{class-open}, @code{class-close}, etc. @xref{Syntactic Symbols},
3915 for a complete list of currently recognized syntactic symbols and
3916 their semantics. The remaining entries are various data associated
3917 with the recognized construct; there might be zero or more.
3918
3919 @cindex anchor position
3920 Conceptually, a line of code is always indented relative to some
3921 position higher up in the buffer (typically the indentation of the
3922 previous line). That position is the @dfn{anchor position} in the
3923 syntactic element. If there is an entry after the syntactic symbol in
3924 the syntactic element list then it's either nil or that anchor position.
3925
3926 Here is an example. Suppose we had the following code as the only thing
3927 in a C++ buffer @footnote{The line numbers in this and future examples
3928 don't actually appear in the buffer, of course!}:
3929
3930 @example
3931 1: void swap( int& a, int& b )
3932 2: @{
3933 3: int tmp = a;
3934 4: a = b;
3935 5: b = tmp;
3936 6: @}
3937 @end example
3938
3939 @noindent
3940 We can use @kbd{C-c C-s} (@code{c-show-syntactic-information}) to
3941 report what the syntactic analysis is for the current line:
3942
3943 @table @asis
3944 @item @kbd{C-c C-s} (@code{c-show-syntactic-information})
3945 @kindex C-c C-s
3946 @findex c-show-syntactic-information
3947 @findex show-syntactic-information (c-)
3948 This command calculates the syntactic analysis of the current line and
3949 displays it in the minibuffer. The command also highlights the anchor
3950 position(s).
3951 @end table
3952
3953 Running this command on line 4 of this example, we'd see in the echo
3954 area@footnote{With a universal argument (i.e., @kbd{C-u C-c C-s}) the
3955 analysis is inserted into the buffer as a comment on the current
3956 line.}:
3957
3958 @example
3959 ((statement 35))
3960 @end example
3961
3962 @noindent
3963 and the @samp{i} of @code{int} on line 3 would be highlighted. This
3964 tells us that the line is a statement and it is indented relative to
3965 buffer position 35, the highlighted position. If you were to move
3966 point to line 3 and hit @kbd{C-c C-s}, you would see:
3967
3968 @example
3969 ((defun-block-intro 29))
3970 @end example
3971
3972 @noindent
3973 This indicates that the @samp{int} line is the first statement in a top
3974 level function block, and is indented relative to buffer position 29,
3975 which is the brace just after the function header.
3976
3977 Here's another example:
3978
3979 @example
3980 1: int add( int val, int incr, int doit )
3981 2: @{
3982 3: if( doit )
3983 4: @{
3984 5: return( val + incr );
3985 6: @}
3986 7: return( val );
3987 8: @}
3988 @end example
3989
3990 @noindent
3991 Hitting @kbd{C-c C-s} on line 4 gives us:
3992
3993 @example
3994 ((substatement-open 46))
3995 @end example
3996
3997 @cindex substatement
3998 @cindex substatement block
3999 @noindent
4000 which tells us that this is a brace that @emph{opens} a substatement
4001 block. @footnote{A @dfn{substatement} is the line after a
4002 conditional statement, such as @code{if}, @code{else}, @code{while},
4003 @code{do}, @code{switch}, etc. A @dfn{substatement
4004 block} is a brace block following one of these conditional statements.}
4005
4006 @cindex comment-only line
4007 Syntactic contexts can contain more than one element, and syntactic
4008 elements need not have anchor positions. The most common example of
4009 this is a @dfn{comment-only line}:
4010
4011 @example
4012 1: void draw_list( List<Drawables>& drawables )
4013 2: @{
4014 3: // call the virtual draw() method on each element in list
4015 4: for( int i=0; i < drawables.count(), ++i )
4016 5: @{
4017 6: drawables[i].draw();
4018 7: @}
4019 8: @}
4020 @end example
4021
4022 @noindent
4023 Hitting @kbd{C-c C-s} on line 3 of this example gives:
4024
4025 @example
4026 ((comment-intro) (defun-block-intro 46))
4027 @end example
4028
4029 @noindent
4030 and you can see that the syntactic context contains two syntactic
4031 elements. Notice that the first element, @samp{(comment-intro)}, has no
4032 anchor position.
4033
4034
4035 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4036 @node Syntactic Symbols, Indentation Calculation, Syntactic Analysis, Indentation Engine Basics
4037 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4038 @section Syntactic Symbols
4039 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4040
4041 @cindex syntactic symbols, brief list
4042 @vindex c-offsets-alist
4043 @vindex offsets-alist (c-)
4044 This section is a complete list of the syntactic symbols which appear
4045 in the @code{c-offsets-alist} style variable, along with brief
4046 descriptions. The previous section (@pxref{Syntactic Analysis})
4047 states what syntactic symbols are and how the indentation engine uses
4048 them.
4049
4050 More detailed descriptions of these symbols, together with snippets of
4051 source code to which they apply, appear in the examples in the
4052 subsections below. Note that, in the interests of brevity, the anchor
4053 position associated with most syntactic symbols is @emph{not}
4054 specified. In cases of doubt, type @kbd{C-c C-s} on a pertinent
4055 line---this highlights the anchor position.
4056
4057 @ssindex -open symbols
4058 @ssindex -close symbols
4059 @ssindex -block-intro symbols
4060 The syntactic symbols which indicate brace constructs follow a general
4061 naming convention. When a line begins with an open or close brace,
4062 its syntactic symbol will contain the suffix @code{-open} or
4063 @code{-close} respectively. The first line within the brace block
4064 construct will contain the suffix @code{-block-intro}.
4065
4066 @ssindex -intro symbols
4067 @ssindex -cont symbols
4068 In constructs which can span several lines, a distinction is usually
4069 made between the first line that introduces the construct and the
4070 lines that continue it. The syntactic symbols that indicate these
4071 lines will contain the suffixes @code{-intro} or @code{-cont}
4072 respectively.
4073
4074 The best way to understand how all this works is by looking at some
4075 examples. Remember that you can see the syntax of any source code
4076 line by using @kbd{C-c C-s}.
4077
4078 @table @code
4079 @item string
4080 Inside a multiline string. @ref{Literal Symbols}.
4081 @item c
4082 Inside a multiline C style block comment. @ref{Literal Symbols}.
4083 @item defun-open
4084 Brace that opens a top-level function definition. @ref{Function
4085 Symbols}.
4086 @item defun-close
4087 Brace that closes a top-level function definition. @ref{Function
4088 Symbols}.
4089 @item defun-block-intro
4090 The first line in a top-level defun. @ref{Function Symbols}.
4091 @item class-open
4092 Brace that opens a class definition. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4093 @item class-close
4094 Brace that closes a class definition. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4095 @item inline-open
4096 Brace that opens an in-class inline method. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4097 @item inline-close
4098 Brace that closes an in-class inline method. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4099 @item func-decl-cont
4100 The region between a function definition's argument list and the
4101 function opening brace (excluding K&R argument declarations). In C,
4102 you cannot put anything but whitespace and comments in this region,
4103 however in C++ and Java, @code{throws} declarations and other things
4104 can appear here. @ref{Literal Symbols}. @c @emph{FIXME!!! Can it not
4105 @c go somewhere better?}
4106 @item knr-argdecl-intro
4107 First line of a K&R C argument declaration. @ref{K&R Symbols}.
4108 @item knr-argdecl
4109 Subsequent lines in a K&R C argument declaration. @ref{K&R Symbols}.
4110 @item topmost-intro
4111 The first line in a ``topmost'' definition. @ref{Function Symbols}.
4112 @item topmost-intro-cont
4113 Topmost definition continuation lines. This is only used in the parts
4114 that aren't covered by other symbols such as @code{func-decl-cont} and
4115 @code{knr-argdecl}. @ref{Function Symbols}.
4116 @item annotation-top-cont
4117 Topmost definition continuation lines where all previous items are
4118 annotations. @ref{Java Symbols}.
4119 @item member-init-intro
4120 First line in a member initialization list. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4121 @item member-init-cont
4122 Subsequent member initialization list lines. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4123 @item inher-intro
4124 First line of a multiple inheritance list. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4125 @item inher-cont
4126 Subsequent multiple inheritance lines. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4127 @item block-open
4128 Statement block open brace. @ref{Literal Symbols}.
4129 @item block-close
4130 Statement block close brace. @ref{Conditional Construct Symbols}.
4131 @item brace-list-open
4132 Open brace of an enum or static array list. @ref{Brace List Symbols}.
4133 @item brace-list-close
4134 Close brace of an enum or static array list. @ref{Brace List Symbols}.
4135 @item brace-list-intro
4136 First line in an enum or static array list. @ref{Brace List Symbols}.
4137 @item brace-list-entry
4138 Subsequent lines in an enum or static array list. @ref{Brace List
4139 Symbols}.
4140 @item brace-entry-open
4141 Subsequent lines in an enum or static array list where the line begins
4142 with an open brace. @ref{Brace List Symbols}.
4143 @item statement
4144 A statement. @ref{Function Symbols}.
4145 @item statement-cont
4146 A continuation of a statement. @ref{Function Symbols}.
4147 @item annotation-var-cont
4148 A continuation of a statement where all previous items are
4149 annotations. @ref{Java Symbols}.
4150 @item statement-block-intro
4151 The first line in a new statement block. @ref{Conditional Construct
4152 Symbols}.
4153 @item statement-case-intro
4154 The first line in a case block. @ref{Switch Statement Symbols}.
4155 @item statement-case-open
4156 The first line in a case block that starts with a brace. @ref{Switch
4157 Statement Symbols}.
4158 @item substatement
4159 The first line after a conditional or loop construct.
4160 @ref{Conditional Construct Symbols}.
4161 @item substatement-open
4162 The brace that opens a substatement block. @ref{Conditional Construct
4163 Symbols}.
4164 @item substatement-label
4165 The first line after a conditional or loop construct if it's a label.
4166 @ref{Conditional Construct Symbols}.
4167 @item case-label
4168 A label in a @code{switch} block. @ref{Switch Statement Symbols}.
4169 @item access-label
4170 C++ access control label. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4171 @item label
4172 Any other label. @ref{Literal Symbols}.
4173 @item do-while-closure
4174 The @code{while} line that ends a @code{do}-@code{while} construct.
4175 @ref{Conditional Construct Symbols}.
4176 @item else-clause
4177 The @code{else} line of an @code{if}-@code{else} construct.
4178 @ref{Conditional Construct Symbols}.
4179 @item catch-clause
4180 The @code{catch} or @code{finally} (in Java) line of a
4181 @code{try}-@code{catch} construct. @ref{Conditional Construct
4182 Symbols}.
4183 @item comment-intro
4184 A line containing only a comment introduction. @ref{Literal Symbols}.
4185 @item arglist-intro
4186 The first line in an argument list. @ref{Paren List Symbols}.
4187 @item arglist-cont
4188 Subsequent argument list lines when no arguments follow on the same
4189 line as the arglist opening paren. @ref{Paren List Symbols}.
4190 @item arglist-cont-nonempty
4191 Subsequent argument list lines when at least one argument follows on
4192 the same line as the arglist opening paren. @ref{Paren List Symbols}.
4193 @item arglist-close
4194 The solo close paren of an argument list. @ref{Paren List Symbols}.
4195 @item stream-op
4196 Lines continuing a stream operator (C++ only). @ref{Literal
4197 Symbols}. @c @emph{FIXME!!! Can this not be moved somewhere better?}
4198 @item inclass
4199 The line is nested inside a class definition. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4200 @item cpp-macro
4201 The start of a preprocessor macro definition. @ref{Literal Symbols}.
4202 @item cpp-define-intro
4203 The first line inside a multiline preprocessor macro if
4204 @code{c-syntactic-indentation-in-macros} is set. @ref{Multiline Macro
4205 Symbols}.
4206 @item cpp-macro-cont
4207 All lines inside multiline preprocessor macros if
4208 @code{c-syntactic-indentation-in-macros} is @code{nil}.
4209 @ref{Multiline Macro Symbols}.
4210 @item friend
4211 A C++ friend declaration. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4212 @item objc-method-intro
4213 The first line of an Objective-C method definition. @ref{Objective-C
4214 Method Symbols}.
4215 @item objc-method-args-cont
4216 Lines continuing an Objective-C method definition. @ref{Objective-C
4217 Method Symbols}.
4218 @item objc-method-call-cont
4219 Lines continuing an Objective-C method call. @ref{Objective-C Method
4220 Symbols}.
4221 @item extern-lang-open
4222 Brace that opens an @code{extern} block (e.g., @code{extern "C"
4223 @{...@}}). @ref{External Scope Symbols}.
4224 @item extern-lang-close
4225 Brace that closes an @code{extern} block. @ref{External Scope
4226 Symbols}.
4227 @item inextern-lang
4228 Analogous to @code{inclass} syntactic symbol, but used inside
4229 @code{extern} blocks. @ref{External Scope Symbols}.
4230 @item namespace-open
4231 @itemx namespace-close
4232 @itemx innamespace
4233 These are analogous to the three @code{extern-lang} symbols above, but
4234 are returned for C++ namespace blocks. @ref{External Scope Symbols}.
4235 @item module-open
4236 @itemx module-close
4237 @itemx inmodule
4238 Analogous to the above, but for CORBA IDL @code{module} blocks.
4239 @ref{External Scope Symbols}.
4240 @item composition-open
4241 @itemx composition-close
4242 @itemx incomposition
4243 Analogous to the above, but for CORBA CIDL @code{composition} blocks.
4244 @ref{External Scope Symbols}.
4245 @item template-args-cont
4246 C++ template argument list continuations. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4247 @item inlambda
4248 Analogous to @code{inclass} syntactic symbol, but used inside lambda
4249 (i.e., anonymous) functions. Only used in Pike mode. @ref{Statement
4250 Block Symbols}.
4251 @item lambda-intro-cont
4252 Lines continuing the header of a lambda function, i.e., between the
4253 @code{lambda} keyword and the function body. Only used in Pike mode.
4254 @ref{Statement Block Symbols}.
4255 @item inexpr-statement
4256 A statement block inside an expression. The gcc C and C++ extension
4257 for this is recognized. It's also used for the special functions that
4258 take a statement block as an argument in Pike. @ref{Statement Block
4259 Symbols}.
4260 @item inexpr-class
4261 A class definition inside an expression. This is used for anonymous
4262 classes in Java. It's also used for anonymous array initializers in
4263 Java. @ref{Java Symbols}.
4264 @end table
4265
4266 @menu
4267 * Function Symbols::
4268 * Class Symbols::
4269 * Conditional Construct Symbols::
4270 * Switch Statement Symbols::
4271 * Brace List Symbols::
4272 * External Scope Symbols::
4273 * Paren List Symbols::
4274 * Literal Symbols::
4275 * Multiline Macro Symbols::
4276 * Objective-C Method Symbols::
4277 * Java Symbols::
4278 * Statement Block Symbols::
4279 * K&R Symbols::
4280 @end menu
4281
4282 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4283 @node Function Symbols, Class Symbols, Syntactic Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4284 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4285 @subsection Function Symbols
4286 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4287
4288 This example shows a typical function declaration.
4289
4290 @example
4291 1: void
4292 2: swap( int& a, int& b )
4293 3: @{
4294 4: int tmp = a;
4295 5: a = b;
4296 6: b = tmp;
4297 7: int ignored =
4298 8: a + b;
4299 9: @}
4300 @end example
4301
4302 @ssindex topmost-intro
4303 @ssindex topmost-intro-cont
4304 @ssindex defun-open
4305 @ssindex defun-close
4306 @ssindex defun-block-intro
4307 Line 1 shows a @code{topmost-intro} since it is the first line that
4308 introduces a top-level construct. Line 2 is a continuation of the
4309 top-level construct introduction so it has the syntax
4310 @code{topmost-intro-cont}. Line 3 shows a @code{defun-open} since it is
4311 the brace that opens a top-level function definition. Line 9 is the
4312 corresponding
4313 @code{defun-close} since it contains the brace that closes the top-level
4314 function definition. Line 4 is a @code{defun-block-intro}, i.e., it is
4315 the first line of a brace-block, enclosed in a
4316 top-level function definition.
4317
4318 @ssindex statement
4319 @ssindex statement-cont
4320 Lines 5, 6, and 7 are all given @code{statement} syntax since there
4321 isn't much special about them. Note however that line 8 is given
4322 @code{statement-cont} syntax since it continues the statement begun
4323 on the previous line.
4324
4325 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4326 @node Class Symbols, Conditional Construct Symbols, Function Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4327 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4328 @subsection Class related Symbols
4329 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4330
4331 Here's an example which illustrates some C++ class syntactic symbols:
4332
4333 @example
4334 1: class Bass
4335 2: : public Guitar,
4336 3: public Amplifiable
4337 4: @{
4338 5: public:
4339 6: Bass()
4340 7: : eString( new BassString( 0.105 )),
4341 8: aString( new BassString( 0.085 )),
4342 9: dString( new BassString( 0.065 )),
4343 10: gString( new BassString( 0.045 ))
4344 11: @{
4345 12: eString.tune( 'E' );
4346 13: aString.tune( 'A' );
4347 14: dString.tune( 'D' );
4348 15: gString.tune( 'G' );
4349 16: @}
4350 17: friend class Luthier;
4351 18: @};
4352 @end example
4353
4354 @ssindex class-open
4355 @ssindex class-close
4356 As in the previous example, line 1 has the @code{topmost-intro} syntax.
4357 Here however, the brace that opens a C++ class definition on line 4 is
4358 assigned the @code{class-open} syntax. Note that in C++, classes,
4359 structs, and unions are essentially equivalent syntactically (and are
4360 very similar semantically), so replacing the @code{class} keyword in the
4361 example above with @code{struct} or @code{union} would still result in a
4362 syntax of @code{class-open} for line 4 @footnote{This is the case even
4363 for C and Objective-C@. For consistency, structs in all supported
4364 languages are syntactically equivalent to classes. Note however that
4365 the keyword @code{class} is meaningless in C and Objective-C.}.
4366 Similarly, line 18 is assigned @code{class-close} syntax.
4367
4368 @ssindex inher-intro
4369 @ssindex inher-cont
4370 Line 2 introduces the inheritance list for the class so it is assigned
4371 the @code{inher-intro} syntax, and line 3, which continues the
4372 inheritance list is given @code{inher-cont} syntax.
4373
4374 @ssindex access-label
4375 @ssindex inclass
4376 Hitting @kbd{C-c C-s} on line 5 shows the following analysis:
4377
4378 @example
4379 ((inclass 58) (access-label 58))
4380 @end example
4381
4382 @noindent
4383 The primary syntactic symbol for this line is @code{access-label} as
4384 this is a label keyword that specifies access protection in C++. However,
4385 because this line is also a top-level construct inside a class
4386 definition, the analysis actually shows two syntactic symbols. The
4387 other syntactic symbol assigned to this line is @code{inclass}.
4388 Similarly, line 6 is given both @code{inclass} and @code{topmost-intro}
4389 syntax:
4390
4391 @example
4392 ((inclass 58) (topmost-intro 60))
4393 @end example
4394
4395 @ssindex member-init-intro
4396 @ssindex member-init-cont
4397 Line 7 introduces a C++ member initialization list and as such is given
4398 @code{member-init-intro} syntax. Note that in this case it is
4399 @emph{not} assigned @code{inclass} since this is not considered a
4400 top-level construct. Lines 8 through 10 are all assigned
4401 @code{member-init-cont} since they continue the member initialization
4402 list started on line 7.
4403
4404 @cindex in-class inline methods
4405 @ssindex inline-open
4406 @ssindex inline-close
4407 Line 11's analysis is a bit more complicated:
4408
4409 @example
4410 ((inclass 58) (inline-open))
4411 @end example
4412
4413 This line is assigned a syntax of both @code{inline-open} and
4414 @code{inclass} because it opens an @dfn{in-class} C++ inline method
4415 definition. This is distinct from, but related to, the C++ notion of an
4416 inline function in that its definition occurs inside an enclosing class
4417 definition, which in C++ implies that the function should be inlined.
4418 However, if the definition of the @code{Bass} constructor appeared
4419 outside the class definition, the construct would be given the
4420 @code{defun-open} syntax, even if the keyword @code{inline} appeared
4421 before the method name, as in:
4422
4423 @example
4424 1: class Bass
4425 2: : public Guitar,
4426 3: public Amplifiable
4427 4: @{
4428 5: public:
4429 6: Bass();
4430 7: @};
4431 8:
4432 9: inline
4433 10: Bass::Bass()
4434 11: : eString( new BassString( 0.105 )),
4435 12: aString( new BassString( 0.085 )),
4436 13: dString( new BassString( 0.065 )),
4437 14: gString( new BassString( 0.045 ))
4438 15: @{
4439 16: eString.tune( 'E' );
4440 17: aString.tune( 'A' );
4441 18: dString.tune( 'D' );
4442 19: gString.tune( 'G' );
4443 20: @}
4444 @end example
4445
4446 @ssindex friend
4447 Returning to the previous example, line 16 is given @code{inline-close}
4448 syntax, while line 12 is given @code{defun-block-open} syntax, and lines
4449 13 through 15 are all given @code{statement} syntax. Line 17 is
4450 interesting in that its syntactic analysis list contains three
4451 elements:
4452
4453 @example
4454 ((inclass 58) (topmost-intro 380) (friend))
4455 @end example
4456
4457 The @code{friend} and @code{inline-open} syntactic symbols are
4458 modifiers that do not have anchor positions.
4459
4460 @ssindex template-args-cont
4461 Template definitions introduce yet another syntactic symbol:
4462
4463 @example
4464 1: ThingManager <int,
4465 2: Framework::Callback *,
4466 3: Mutex> framework_callbacks;
4467 @end example
4468
4469 Here, line 1 is analyzed as a @code{topmost-intro}, but lines 2 and 3
4470 are both analyzed as @code{template-args-cont} lines.
4471
4472 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4473 @node Conditional Construct Symbols, Switch Statement Symbols, Class Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4474 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4475 @subsection Conditional Construct Symbols
4476 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4477
4478 Here is a (totally contrived) example which illustrates how syntax is
4479 assigned to various conditional constructs:
4480
4481 @example
4482 1: void spam( int index )
4483 2: @{
4484 3: for( int i=0; i<index; i++ )
4485 4: @{
4486 5: if( i == 10 )
4487 6: do_something_special();
4488 7: else
4489 8: silly_label:
4490 9: do_something( i );
4491 10: @}
4492 11: do @{
4493 12: another_thing( i-- );
4494 13: @}
4495 14: while( i > 0 );
4496 15: @}
4497 @end example
4498
4499 Only the lines that illustrate new syntactic symbols will be discussed.
4500
4501 @ssindex substatement-open
4502 @ssindex statement-block-intro
4503 @ssindex block-close
4504 Line 4 has a brace which opens a conditional's substatement block. It
4505 is thus assigned @code{substatement-open} syntax, and since line 5 is
4506 the first line in the substatement block, it is assigned
4507 @code{statement-block-intro} syntax. Line 10 contains the brace
4508 that closes the inner substatement block, and is therefore given the
4509 syntax @code{block-close}@footnote{@code{block-open} is used only for
4510 ``free-standing'' blocks, and is somewhat rare (@pxref{Literal
4511 Symbols} for an example.)}. Line 13 is treated the same way.
4512
4513 @ssindex substatement
4514 Lines 6 and 9 are also substatements of conditionals, but since they
4515 don't start blocks they are given @code{substatement} syntax
4516 instead of @code{substatement-open}.
4517
4518 @ssindex substatement-label
4519 Line 8 contains a label, which is normally given @code{label} syntax.
4520 This one is however a bit special since it's between a conditional and
4521 its substatement. It's analyzed as @code{substatement-label} to let you
4522 handle this rather odd case differently from normal labels.
4523
4524 @ssindex else-clause
4525 @ssindex catch-clause
4526 Line 7 start with an @code{else} that matches the @code{if} statement on
4527 line 5. It is therefore given the @code{else-clause} syntax and is
4528 anchored on the matching @code{if}. The @code{try}-@code{catch}
4529 constructs in C++ and Java are treated this way too, except that
4530 @code{catch} and (in Java) @code{finally}, are marked with
4531 @code{catch-clause}.
4532
4533 @ssindex do-while-closure
4534 The @code{while} construct on line 14 that closes a @code{do}
4535 conditional is given the special syntax @code{do-while-closure} if it
4536 appears on a line by itself. Note that if the @code{while} appeared on
4537 the same line as the preceding close brace, that line would still have
4538 @code{block-close} syntax.
4539
4540 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4541 @node Switch Statement Symbols, Brace List Symbols, Conditional Construct Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4542 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4543 @subsection Switch Statement Symbols
4544 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4545
4546 Switch statements have their own set of syntactic symbols. Here's an
4547 example:
4548
4549 @example
4550 1: void spam( enum Ingredient i )
4551 2: @{
4552 3: switch( i ) @{
4553 4: case Ham:
4554 5: be_a_pig();
4555 6: break;
4556 7: case Salt:
4557 8: drink_some_water();
4558 9: break;
4559 10: default:
4560 11: @{
4561 12: what_is_it();
4562 13: break;
4563 14: @}
4564 15: @}
4565 14: @}
4566 @end example
4567
4568 @ssindex case-label
4569 @ssindex statement-case-intro
4570 @ssindex statement-case-open
4571 Here, lines 4, 7, and 10 are all assigned @code{case-label} syntax,
4572 while lines 5 and 8 are assigned @code{statement-case-intro}. Line 11
4573 is treated slightly differently since it contains a brace that opens a
4574 block; it is given @code{statement-case-open} syntax.
4575
4576 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4577 @node Brace List Symbols, External Scope Symbols, Switch Statement Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4578 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4579 @subsection Brace List Symbols
4580 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4581
4582 @cindex brace lists
4583 There are a set of syntactic symbols that are used to recognize
4584 constructs inside of brace lists. A brace list is defined as an
4585 @code{enum} or aggregate initializer list, such as might statically
4586 initialize an array of structs. The three special aggregate constructs
4587 in Pike, @code{(@{ @})}, @code{([ ])} and @code{(< >)}, are treated as
4588 brace lists too. An example:
4589
4590 @example
4591 1: static char* ingredients[] =
4592 2: @{
4593 3: "Ham",
4594 4: "Salt",
4595 5: NULL
4596 6: @};
4597 @end example
4598
4599 @ssindex brace-list-open
4600 @ssindex brace-list-intro
4601 @ssindex brace-list-close
4602 @ssindex brace-list-entry
4603 Following convention, line 2 in this example is assigned
4604 @code{brace-list-open} syntax, and line 3 is assigned
4605 @code{brace-list-intro} syntax. Likewise, line 6 is assigned
4606 @code{brace-list-close} syntax. Lines 4 and 5 however, are assigned
4607 @code{brace-list-entry} syntax, as would all subsequent lines in this
4608 initializer list.
4609
4610 @ssindex brace-entry-open
4611 Your static initializer might be initializing nested structures, for
4612 example:
4613
4614 @example
4615 1: struct intpairs[] =
4616 2: @{
4617 3: @{ 1, 2 @},
4618 4: @{
4619 5: 3,
4620 6: 4
4621 7: @}
4622 8: @{ 1,
4623 9: 2 @},
4624 10: @{ 3, 4 @}
4625 11: @};
4626 @end example
4627
4628 Here, you've already seen the analysis of lines 1, 2, 3, and 11. On
4629 line 4, things get interesting; this line is assigned
4630 @code{brace-entry-open} syntactic symbol because it's a bracelist entry
4631 line that starts with an open brace. Lines 5 and 6 (and line 9) are
4632 pretty standard, and line 7 is a @code{brace-list-close} as you'd
4633 expect. Once again, line 8 is assigned as @code{brace-entry-open} as is
4634 line 10.
4635
4636 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4637 @node External Scope Symbols, Paren List Symbols, Brace List Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4638 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4639 @subsection External Scope Symbols
4640 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4641
4642 External language definition blocks also have their own syntactic
4643 symbols. In this example:
4644
4645 @example
4646 1: extern "C"
4647 2: @{
4648 3: int thing_one( int );
4649 4: int thing_two( double );
4650 5: @}
4651 @end example
4652
4653 @ssindex extern-lang-open
4654 @ssindex extern-lang-close
4655 @ssindex inextern-lang
4656 @ssindex inclass
4657 @noindent
4658 line 2 is given the @code{extern-lang-open} syntax, while line 5 is given
4659 the @code{extern-lang-close} syntax. The analysis for line 3 yields:
4660
4661 @example
4662 ((inextern-lang) (topmost-intro 14))
4663 @end example
4664
4665 @noindent
4666 where @code{inextern-lang} is a modifier similar in purpose to
4667 @code{inclass}.
4668
4669 There are various other top level blocks like @code{extern}, and they
4670 are all treated in the same way except that the symbols are named after
4671 the keyword that introduces the block. E.g., C++ namespace blocks get
4672 the three symbols @code{namespace-open}, @code{namespace-close} and
4673 @code{innamespace}. The currently recognized top level blocks are:
4674
4675 @table @asis
4676 @item @code{extern-lang-open}, @code{extern-lang-close}, @code{inextern-lang}
4677 @code{extern} blocks in C and C++.@footnote{These should logically be
4678 named @code{extern-open}, @code{extern-close} and @code{inextern}, but
4679 that isn't the case for historical reasons.}
4680
4681 @item @code{namespace-open}, @code{namespace-close}, @code{innamespace}
4682 @ssindex namespace-open
4683 @ssindex namespace-close
4684 @ssindex innamespace
4685 @code{namespace} blocks in C++.
4686
4687 @item @code{module-open}, @code{module-close}, @code{inmodule}
4688 @ssindex module-open
4689 @ssindex module-close
4690 @ssindex inmodule
4691 @code{module} blocks in CORBA IDL.
4692
4693 @item @code{composition-open}, @code{composition-close}, @code{incomposition}
4694 @ssindex composition-open
4695 @ssindex composition-close
4696 @ssindex incomposition
4697 @code{composition} blocks in CORBA CIDL.
4698 @end table
4699
4700 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4701 @node Paren List Symbols, Literal Symbols, External Scope Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4702 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4703 @subsection Parenthesis (Argument) List Symbols
4704 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4705
4706 A number of syntactic symbols are associated with parenthesis lists,
4707 a.k.a argument lists, as found in function declarations and function
4708 calls. This example illustrates these:
4709
4710 @example
4711 1: void a_function( int line1,
4712 2: int line2 );
4713 3:
4714 4: void a_longer_function(
4715 5: int line1,
4716 6: int line2
4717 7: );
4718 8:
4719 9: void call_them( int line1, int line2 )
4720 10: @{
4721 11: a_function(
4722 12: line1,
4723 13: line2
4724 14: );
4725 15:
4726 16: a_longer_function( line1,
4727 17: line2 );
4728 18: @}
4729 @end example
4730
4731 @ssindex arglist-intro
4732 @ssindex arglist-close
4733 Lines 5 and 12 are assigned @code{arglist-intro} syntax since they are
4734 the first line following the open parenthesis, and lines 7 and 14 are
4735 assigned @code{arglist-close} syntax since they contain the parenthesis
4736 that closes the argument list.
4737
4738 @ssindex arglist-cont-nonempty
4739 @ssindex arglist-cont
4740 Lines that continue argument lists can be assigned one of two syntactic
4741 symbols. For example, Lines 2 and 17
4742 are assigned @code{arglist-cont-nonempty} syntax. What this means
4743 is that they continue an argument list, but that the line containing the
4744 parenthesis that opens the list is @emph{not empty} following the open
4745 parenthesis. Contrast this against lines 6 and 13 which are assigned
4746 @code{arglist-cont} syntax. This is because the parenthesis that opens
4747 their argument lists is the last character on that line.
4748
4749 Syntactic elements with @code{arglist-intro},
4750 @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}, and @code{arglist-close} contain two
4751 buffer positions: the anchor position (the beginning of the
4752 declaration or statement) and the position of the open parenthesis.
4753 The latter position can be used in a line-up function (@pxref{Line-Up
4754 Functions}).
4755
4756 Note that there is no @code{arglist-open} syntax. This is because any
4757 parenthesis that opens an argument list, appearing on a separate line,
4758 is assigned the @code{statement-cont} syntax instead.
4759
4760 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4761 @node Literal Symbols, Multiline Macro Symbols, Paren List Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4762 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4763 @subsection Comment String Label and Macro Symbols
4764 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4765
4766 A few miscellaneous syntactic symbols that haven't been previously
4767 covered are illustrated by this C++ example:
4768
4769 @example
4770 1: void Bass::play( int volume )
4771 2: const
4772 3: @{
4773 4: /* this line starts a multiline
4774 5: * comment. This line should get `c' syntax */
4775 6:
4776 7: char* a_multiline_string = "This line starts a multiline \
4777 8: string. This line should get `string' syntax.";
4778 9:
4779 10: note:
4780 11: @{
4781 12: #ifdef LOCK
4782 13: Lock acquire();
4783 14: #endif // LOCK
4784 15: slap_pop();
4785 16: cout << "I played "
4786 17: << "a note\n";
4787 18: @}
4788 19: @}
4789 @end example
4790
4791 The lines to note in this example include:
4792
4793 @itemize @bullet
4794 @item
4795 @ssindex func-decl-cont
4796 Line 2 is assigned the @code{func-decl-cont} syntax.
4797
4798 @item
4799 @ssindex comment-intro
4800 Line 4 is assigned both @code{defun-block-intro} @emph{and}
4801 @code{comment-intro} syntax. A syntactic element with
4802 @code{comment-intro} has no anchor point. It is always accompanied
4803 by another syntactic element which does have one.
4804
4805 @item
4806 @ssindex c
4807 Line 5 is assigned @code{c} syntax.
4808
4809 @item
4810 @cindex syntactic whitespace
4811 Line 6 which, even though it contains nothing but whitespace, is
4812 assigned @code{defun-block-intro}. Note that the appearance of the
4813 comment on lines 4 and 5 do not cause line 6 to be assigned
4814 @code{statement} syntax because comments are considered to be
4815 @dfn{syntactic whitespace}, which are ignored when analyzing
4816 code.
4817
4818 @item
4819 @ssindex string
4820 Line 8 is assigned @code{string} syntax.
4821
4822 @item
4823 @ssindex label
4824 Line 10 is assigned @code{label} syntax.
4825
4826 @item
4827 @ssindex block-open
4828 Line 11 is assigned @code{block-open} as well as @code{statement}
4829 syntax. A @code{block-open} syntactic element doesn't have an anchor
4830 position, since it always appears with another syntactic element which
4831 does have one.
4832
4833 @item
4834 @ssindex cpp-macro
4835 Lines 12 and 14 are assigned @code{cpp-macro} syntax in addition to the
4836 normal syntactic symbols (@code{statement-block-intro} and
4837 @code{statement}, respectively). Normally @code{cpp-macro} is
4838 configured to cancel out the normal syntactic context to make all
4839 preprocessor directives stick to the first column, but that's easily
4840 changed if you want preprocessor directives to be indented like the rest
4841 of the code. Like @code{comment-intro}, a syntactic element with
4842 @code{cpp-macro} doesn't contain an anchor position.
4843
4844 @item
4845 @ssindex stream-op
4846 Line 17 is assigned @code{stream-op} syntax.
4847 @end itemize
4848
4849 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4850 @node Multiline Macro Symbols, Objective-C Method Symbols, Literal Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4851 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4852 @subsection Multiline Macro Symbols
4853 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4854
4855 @cindex multiline macros
4856 @cindex syntactic whitespace
4857 @ssindex cpp-define-intro
4858 @ssindex cpp-macro-cont
4859 Multiline preprocessor macro definitions are normally handled just like
4860 other code, i.e., the lines inside them are indented according to the
4861 syntactic analysis of the preceding lines inside the macro. The first
4862 line inside a macro definition (i.e., the line after the starting line of
4863 the cpp directive itself) gets @code{cpp-define-intro}. In this example:
4864
4865 @example
4866 1: #define LIST_LOOP(cons, listp) \
4867 2: for (cons = listp; !NILP (cons); cons = XCDR (cons)) \
4868 3: if (!CONSP (cons)) \
4869 4: signal_error ("Invalid list format", listp); \
4870 5: else
4871 @end example
4872
4873 @noindent
4874 line 1 is given the syntactic symbol @code{cpp-macro}. The first line
4875 of a cpp directive is always given that symbol. Line 2 is given
4876 @code{cpp-define-intro}, so that you can give the macro body as a whole
4877 some extra indentation. Lines 3 through 5 are then analyzed as normal
4878 code, i.e., @code{substatement} on lines 3 and 4, and @code{else-clause}
4879 on line 5.
4880
4881 The syntactic analysis inside macros can be turned off with
4882 @code{c-syntactic-indentation-in-macros} (@pxref{Custom Macros}). In
4883 that case, lines 2 through 5 would all be given @code{cpp-macro-cont}
4884 with an anchor position pointing to the @code{#} which starts the cpp
4885 directive@footnote{This is how @ccmode{} 5.28 and earlier analyzed
4886 macros.}.
4887
4888 @xref{Custom Macros}, for more info about the treatment of macros.
4889
4890 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4891 @node Objective-C Method Symbols, Java Symbols, Multiline Macro Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4892 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4893 @subsection Objective-C Method Symbols
4894 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4895
4896 In Objective-C buffers, there are three additional syntactic symbols
4897 assigned to various message calling constructs. Here's an example
4898 illustrating these:
4899
4900 @example
4901 1: - (void)setDelegate:anObject
4902 2: withStuff:stuff
4903 3: @{
4904 4: [delegate masterWillRebind:self
4905 5: toDelegate:anObject
4906 6: withExtraStuff:stuff];
4907 7: @}
4908 @end example
4909
4910 @ssindex objc-method-intro
4911 @ssindex objc-method-args-cont
4912 @ssindex objc-method-call-cont
4913 Here, line 1 is assigned @code{objc-method-intro} syntax, and line 2 is
4914 assigned @code{objc-method-args-cont} syntax. Lines 5 and 6 are both
4915 assigned @code{objc-method-call-cont} syntax.
4916
4917 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4918 @node Java Symbols, Statement Block Symbols, Objective-C Method Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4919 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4920 @subsection Java Symbols
4921 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4922
4923 Java has a concept of anonymous classes which can look something like
4924 this:
4925
4926 @example
4927 1: @@Test
4928 2: public void watch(Observable o) @{
4929 3: @@NonNull
4930 4: Observer obs = new Observer() @{
4931 5: public void update(Observable o, Object arg) @{
4932 6: history.addElement(arg);
4933 7: @}
4934 8: @};
4935 9: o.addObserver(obs);
4936 10: @}
4937 @end example
4938
4939 @ssindex inexpr-class
4940 The brace following the @code{new} operator opens the anonymous class.
4941 Lines 5 and 8 are assigned the @code{inexpr-class} syntax, besides the
4942 @code{inclass} symbol used in normal classes. Thus, the class will be
4943 indented just like a normal class, with the added indentation given to
4944 @code{inexpr-class}. An @code{inexpr-class} syntactic element doesn't
4945 have an anchor position.
4946
4947 @ssindex annotation-top-cont
4948 @ssindex annotation-var-cont
4949 Line 2 is assigned the @code{annotation-top-cont} syntax, due to it being a
4950 continuation of a topmost introduction with an annotation symbol preceding
4951 the current line. Similarly, line 4 is assigned the @code{annotation-var-cont}
4952 syntax due to it being a continuation of a variable declaration where preceding
4953 the declaration is an annotation.
4954
4955 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4956 @node Statement Block Symbols, K&R Symbols, Java Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4957 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4958 @subsection Statement Block Symbols
4959 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4960
4961 There are a few occasions where a statement block might be used inside
4962 an expression. One is in C or C++ code using the gcc extension for
4963 this, e.g.:
4964
4965 @example
4966 1: int res = (@{
4967 2: int y = foo (); int z;
4968 3: if (y > 0) z = y; else z = - y;
4969 4: z;
4970 5: @});
4971 @end example
4972
4973 @ssindex inexpr-statement
4974 Lines 2 and 5 get the @code{inexpr-statement} syntax, besides the
4975 symbols they'd get in a normal block. Therefore, the indentation put on
4976 @code{inexpr-statement} is added to the normal statement block
4977 indentation. An @code{inexpr-statement} syntactic element doesn't
4978 contain an anchor position.
4979
4980 In Pike code, there are a few other situations where blocks occur inside
4981 statements, as illustrated here:
4982
4983 @example
4984 1: array itgob()
4985 2: @{
4986 3: string s = map (backtrace()[-2][3..],
4987 4: lambda
4988 5: (mixed arg)
4989 6: @{
4990 7: return sprintf ("%t", arg);
4991 8: @}) * ", " + "\n";
4992 9: return catch @{
4993 10: write (s + "\n");
4994 11: @};
4995 12: @}
4996 @end example
4997
4998 @ssindex inlambda
4999 @ssindex lambda-intro-cont
5000 Lines 4 through 8 contain a lambda function, which @ccmode{} recognizes
5001 by the @code{lambda} keyword. If the function argument list is put
5002 on a line of its own, as in line 5, it gets the @code{lambda-intro-cont}
5003 syntax. The function body is handled as an inline method body, with the
5004 addition of the @code{inlambda} syntactic symbol. This means that line
5005 6 gets @code{inlambda} and @code{inline-open}, and line 8 gets
5006 @code{inline-close}@footnote{You might wonder why it doesn't get
5007 @code{inlambda} too. It's because the closing brace is relative to the
5008 opening brace, which stands on its own line in this example. If the
5009 opening brace was hanging on the previous line, then the closing brace
5010 would get the @code{inlambda} syntax too to be indented correctly.}.
5011
5012 @ssindex inexpr-statement
5013 On line 9, @code{catch} is a special function taking a statement block
5014 as its argument. The block is handled as an in-expression statement
5015 with the @code{inexpr-statement} syntax, just like the gcc extended C
5016 example above. The other similar special function, @code{gauge}, is
5017 handled like this too.
5018
5019 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5020 @node K&R Symbols, , Statement Block Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
5021 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5022 @subsection K&R Symbols
5023 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5024
5025 @ssindex knr-argdecl-intro
5026 @ssindex knr-argdecl
5027 Two other syntactic symbols can appear in old style, non-prototyped C
5028 code @footnote{a.k.a.@: K&R C, or Kernighan & Ritchie C}:
5029
5030 @example
5031 1: int add_three_integers(a, b, c)
5032 2: int a;
5033 3: int b;
5034 4: int c;
5035 5: @{
5036 6: return a + b + c;
5037 7: @}
5038 @end example
5039
5040 Here, line 2 is the first line in an argument declaration list and so is
5041 given the @code{knr-argdecl-intro} syntactic symbol. Subsequent lines
5042 (i.e., lines 3 and 4 in this example), are given @code{knr-argdecl}
5043 syntax.
5044
5045
5046 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5047 @node Indentation Calculation, , Syntactic Symbols, Indentation Engine Basics
5048 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5049 @section Indentation Calculation
5050 @cindex indentation
5051 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5052
5053 Indentation for a line is calculated from the syntactic context
5054 (@pxref{Syntactic Analysis}).
5055
5056 First, a buffer position is found whose column will be the base for the
5057 indentation calculation. It's the anchor position in the first
5058 syntactic element that provides one that is used. If no syntactic
5059 element has an anchor position then column zero is used.
5060
5061 Second, the syntactic symbols in each syntactic element are looked up
5062 in the @code{c-offsets-alist} style variable
5063 (@pxref{c-offsets-alist}), which is an association list of syntactic
5064 symbols and the offsets to apply for those symbols. These offsets are
5065 added together with the base column to produce the new indentation
5066 column.
5067
5068 Let's use our two code examples above to see how this works. Here is
5069 our first example again:
5070
5071 @example
5072 1: void swap( int& a, int& b )
5073 2: @{
5074 3: int tmp = a;
5075 4: a = b;
5076 5: b = tmp;
5077 6: @}
5078 @end example
5079
5080 Let's say point is on line 3 and we hit the @key{TAB} key to reindent
5081 the line. The syntactic context for that line is:
5082
5083 @example
5084 ((defun-block-intro 29))
5085 @end example
5086
5087 @noindent
5088 Since buffer position 29 is the first and only anchor position in the
5089 list, @ccmode{} goes there and asks for the current column. This brace
5090 is in column zero, so @ccmode{} uses @samp{0} as the base column.
5091
5092 Next, @ccmode{} looks up @code{defun-block-intro} in the
5093 @code{c-offsets-alist} style variable. Let's say it finds the value
5094 @samp{4}; it adds this to the base column @samp{0}, yielding a running
5095 total indentation of 4 spaces.
5096
5097 Since there is only one syntactic element on the list for this line,
5098 indentation calculation is complete, and the total indentation for the
5099 line is 4 spaces.
5100
5101 Here's another example:
5102
5103 @example
5104 1: int add( int val, int incr, int doit )
5105 2: @{
5106 3: if( doit )
5107 4: @{
5108 5: return( val + incr );
5109 6: @}
5110 7: return( val );
5111 8: @}
5112 @end example
5113
5114 If we were to hit @kbd{TAB} on line 4 in the above example, the same
5115 basic process is performed, despite the differences in the syntactic
5116 context. The context for this line is:
5117
5118 @example
5119 ((substatement-open 46))
5120 @end example
5121
5122 Here, @ccmode{} goes to buffer position 46, which is the @samp{i} in
5123 @code{if} on line 3. This character is in the fourth column on that
5124 line so the base column is @samp{4}. Then @ccmode{} looks up the
5125 @code{substatement-open} symbol in @code{c-offsets-alist}. Let's say it
5126 finds the value @samp{4}. It's added with the base column and yields an
5127 indentation for the line of 8 spaces.
5128
5129 Simple, huh?
5130
5131 Actually, it's a bit more complicated than that since the entries on
5132 @code{c-offsets-alist} can be much more than plain offsets.
5133 @xref{c-offsets-alist}, for the full story.
5134
5135 Anyway, the mode usually just does The Right Thing without you having to
5136 think about it in this much detail. But when customizing indentation,
5137 it's helpful to understand the general indentation model being used.
5138
5139 As you configure @ccmode{}, you might want to set the variable
5140 @code{c-echo-syntactic-information-p} to non-@code{nil} so that the
5141 syntactic context and calculated offset always is echoed in the
5142 minibuffer when you hit @kbd{TAB}.
5143
5144
5145 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5146 @node Customizing Indentation, Custom Macros, Indentation Engine Basics, Top
5147 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5148 @chapter Customizing Indentation
5149 @cindex customization, indentation
5150 @cindex indentation
5151 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5152
5153 The principal variable for customizing indentation is the style
5154 variable @code{c-offsets-alist}, which gives an @dfn{offset} (an
5155 indentation rule) for each syntactic symbol. Its structure and
5156 semantics are completely described in @ref{c-offsets-alist}. The
5157 various ways you can set the variable, including the use of the
5158 @ccmode{} style system, are described in @ref{Config Basics} and its
5159 sections, in particular @ref{Style Variables}.
5160
5161 The simplest and most used kind of ``offset'' setting in
5162 @code{c-offsets-alist} is in terms of multiples of
5163 @code{c-basic-offset}:
5164
5165 @defopt c-basic-offset
5166 @vindex basic-offset (c-)
5167 This style variable holds the basic offset between indentation levels.
5168 It's factory default is 4, but all the built-in styles set it
5169 themselves, to some value between 2 (for @code{gnu} style) and 8 (for
5170 @code{bsd}, @code{linux}, and @code{python} styles).
5171 @end defopt
5172
5173 The most flexible ``offset'' setting you can make in
5174 @code{c-offsets-alist} is a line-up function (or even a list of them),
5175 either one supplied by @ccmode{} (@pxref{Line-Up Functions}) or one
5176 you write yourself (@pxref{Custom Line-Up}).
5177
5178 Finally, in @ref{Other Indentation} you'll find the tool of last
5179 resort: a hook which is called after a line has been indented. You
5180 can install functions here to make ad-hoc adjustments to any line's
5181 indentation.
5182
5183 @menu
5184 * c-offsets-alist::
5185 * Interactive Customization::
5186 * Line-Up Functions::
5187 * Custom Line-Up::
5188 * Other Indentation::
5189 @end menu
5190
5191
5192 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5193 @node c-offsets-alist, Interactive Customization, Customizing Indentation, Customizing Indentation
5194 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5195 @section c-offsets-alist
5196 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5197
5198 This section explains the structure and semantics of the style
5199 variable @code{c-offsets-alist}, the principal variable for configuring
5200 indentation. Details of how to set it up, and its relationship to
5201 @ccmode{}'s style system are given in @ref{Style Variables}.
5202
5203 @defopt c-offsets-alist
5204 @vindex offsets-alist (c-)
5205 This is an alist which associates an offset with each syntactic
5206 symbol. This @dfn{offset} is a rule specifying how to indent a line
5207 whose syntactic context matches the symbol. @xref{Syntactic
5208 Analysis}.
5209
5210 Note that the buffer-local binding of this alist in a @ccmode{} buffer
5211 contains an entry for @emph{every} syntactic symbol. Its global
5212 binding and its settings within style specifications usually contain
5213 only a few entries. @xref{Style Variables}.
5214
5215 The offset specification associated with any particular syntactic
5216 symbol can be an integer, a variable name, a vector, a function or
5217 lambda expression, a list, or one of the following special symbols:
5218 @code{+}, @code{-}, @code{++}, @code{--}, @code{*}, or @code{/}. The
5219 meanings of these values are described in detail below.
5220
5221 Here is an example fragment of a @code{c-offsets-alist}, showing some
5222 of these kinds of offsets:
5223
5224 @example
5225 ((statement . 0)
5226 (substatement . +)
5227 (cpp-macro . [0])
5228 (topmost-intro-cont . c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont)
5229 (statement-block-intro . (add c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block
5230 c-indent-multi-line-block))
5231 @dots{}
5232 @*)
5233 @end example
5234 @end defopt
5235
5236 @deffn Command c-set-offset (@kbd{C-c C-o})
5237 @findex set-offset (c-)
5238 @kindex C-c C-o
5239 This command changes the entry for a syntactic symbol in the current
5240 binding of @code{c-offsets-alist}, or it inserts a new entry if there
5241 isn't already one for that syntactic symbol.
5242
5243 You can use @code{c-set-offsets} interactively within a @ccmode{}
5244 buffer to make experimental changes to your indentation settings.
5245 @kbd{C-c C-o} prompts you for the syntactic symbol to change
5246 (defaulting to that of the current line) and the new offset
5247 (defaulting to the current offset).
5248
5249 @code{c-set-offsets} takes two arguments when used programmatically:
5250 @var{symbol}, the syntactic element symbol to change and @var{offset},
5251 the new offset for that syntactic element. You can call the command
5252 in your @file{.emacs} to change the global binding of
5253 @code{c-offsets-alist} (@pxref{Style Variables}); you can use it in a
5254 hook function to make changes from the current style. @ccmode{}
5255 itself uses this function when initializing styles.
5256 @end deffn
5257
5258 @cindex offset specification
5259 The ``offset specifications'' in @code{c-offsets-alist} can be any of
5260 the following:
5261
5262 @table @asis
5263 @item An integer
5264 The integer specifies a relative offset. All relative
5265 offsets@footnote{The syntactic context @code{@w{((defun-block-intro
5266 2724) (comment-intro))}} would likely have two relative offsets.} will
5267 be added together and used to calculate the indentation relative to an
5268 anchor position earlier in the buffer. @xref{Indentation
5269 Calculation}, for details. Most of the time, it's probably better to
5270 use one of the special symbols like @code{+} than an integer (apart
5271 from zero).
5272
5273 @item One of the symbols @code{+}, @code{-}, @code{++}, @code{--}, @code{*}, or @code{/}
5274 These special symbols describe a relative offset in multiples of
5275 @code{c-basic-offset}:
5276
5277 By defining a style's indentation in terms of @code{c-basic-offset},
5278 you can change the amount of whitespace given to an indentation level
5279 while maintaining the same basic shape of your code. Here are the
5280 values that the special symbols correspond to:
5281
5282 @table @code
5283 @item +
5284 @code{c-basic-offset} times 1
5285 @item -
5286 @code{c-basic-offset} times @minus{}1
5287 @item ++
5288 @code{c-basic-offset} times 2
5289 @item --
5290 @code{c-basic-offset} times @minus{}2
5291 @item *
5292 @code{c-basic-offset} times 0.5
5293 @item /
5294 @code{c-basic-offset} times @minus{}0.5
5295 @end table
5296
5297 @item A vector
5298 The first element of the vector, an integer, sets the absolute
5299 indentation column. This will override any previously calculated
5300 indentation, but won't override relative indentation calculated from
5301 syntactic elements later on in the syntactic context of the line being
5302 indented. @xref{Indentation Calculation}. Any elements in the vector
5303 beyond the first will be ignored.
5304
5305 @item A function or lambda expression
5306 The function will be called and its return value will in turn be
5307 evaluated as an offset specification. Functions are useful when more
5308 context than just the syntactic symbol is needed to get the desired
5309 indentation. @xref{Line-Up Functions}, and @ref{Custom Line-Up}, for
5310 details about them.
5311
5312 @item A symbol with a variable binding
5313 If the symbol also has a function binding, the function takes
5314 precedence over the variable. Otherwise the value of the variable is
5315 used. It must be an integer (which is used as relative offset) or a
5316 vector (an absolute offset).
5317
5318 @item A list
5319 The offset can also be a list containing several offset
5320 specifications; these are evaluated recursively and combined. A list
5321 is typically only useful when some of the offsets are line-up
5322 functions. A common strategy is calling a sequence of functions in
5323 turn until one of them recognizes that it is appropriate for the
5324 source line and returns a non-@code{nil} value.
5325
5326 @code{nil} values are always ignored when the offsets are combined.
5327 The first element of the list specifies the method of combining the
5328 non-@code{nil} offsets from the remaining elements:
5329
5330 @table @code
5331 @item first
5332 Use the first offset that doesn't evaluate to @code{nil}. Subsequent
5333 elements of the list don't get evaluated.
5334 @item min
5335 Use the minimum of all the offsets. All must be either relative or
5336 absolute; they can't be mixed.
5337 @item max
5338 Use the maximum of all the offsets. All must be either relative or
5339 absolute; they can't be mixed.
5340 @item add
5341 Add all the evaluated offsets together. Exactly one of them may be
5342 absolute, in which case the result is absolute. Any relative offsets
5343 that preceded the absolute one in the list will be ignored in that case.
5344 @end table
5345
5346 As a compatibility measure, if the first element is none of the above
5347 then it too will be taken as an offset specification and the whole list
5348 will be combined according to the method @code{first}.
5349 @end table
5350
5351 @vindex c-strict-syntax-p
5352 @vindex strict-syntax-p (c-)
5353 If an offset specification evaluates to @code{nil}, then a relative
5354 offset of 0 (zero) is used@footnote{There is however a variable
5355 @code{c-strict-syntax-p} that when set to non-@code{nil} will cause an
5356 error to be signaled in that case. It's now considered obsolete since
5357 it doesn't work well with some of the alignment functions that return
5358 @code{nil} instead of zero. You should therefore leave
5359 @code{c-strict-syntax-p} set to @code{nil}.}.
5360
5361 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5362 @node Interactive Customization, Line-Up Functions, c-offsets-alist, Customizing Indentation
5363 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5364 @section Interactive Customization
5365 @cindex customization, interactive
5366 @cindex interactive customization
5367 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5368
5369 As an example of how to customize indentation, let's change the
5370 style of this example@footnote{In this and subsequent examples, the
5371 original code is formatted using the @samp{gnu} style unless otherwise
5372 indicated. @xref{Styles}.}:
5373
5374 @example
5375 @group
5376 1: int add( int val, int incr, int doit )
5377 2: @{
5378 3: if( doit )
5379 4: @{
5380 5: return( val + incr );
5381 6: @}
5382 7: return( val );
5383 8: @}
5384 @end group
5385 @end example
5386
5387 @noindent
5388 to:
5389
5390 @example
5391 @group
5392 1: int add( int val, int incr, int doit )
5393 2: @{
5394 3: if( doit )
5395 4: @{
5396 5: return( val + incr );
5397 6: @}
5398 7: return( val );
5399 8: @}
5400 @end group
5401 @end example
5402
5403 In other words, we want to change the indentation of braces that open a
5404 block following a condition so that the braces line up under the
5405 conditional, instead of being indented. Notice that the construct we
5406 want to change starts on line 4. To change the indentation of a line,
5407 we need to see which syntactic symbols affect the offset calculations
5408 for that line. Hitting @kbd{C-c C-s} on line 4 yields:
5409
5410 @example
5411 ((substatement-open 44))
5412 @end example
5413
5414 @noindent
5415 so we know that to change the offset of the open brace, we need to
5416 change the indentation for the @code{substatement-open} syntactic
5417 symbol.
5418
5419 To do this interactively, just hit @kbd{C-c C-o}. This prompts
5420 you for the syntactic symbol to change, providing a reasonable default.
5421 In this case, the default is @code{substatement-open}, which is just the
5422 syntactic symbol we want to change!
5423
5424 After you hit return, @ccmode{} will then prompt you for the new
5425 offset value, with the old value as the default. The default in this
5426 case is @samp{+}, but we want no extra indentation so enter
5427 @samp{0} and @kbd{RET}. This will associate the offset 0 with the
5428 syntactic symbol @code{substatement-open}.
5429
5430 To check your changes quickly, just hit @kbd{C-c C-q}
5431 (@code{c-indent-defun}) to reindent the entire function. The example
5432 should now look like:
5433
5434 @example
5435 @group
5436 1: int add( int val, int incr, int doit )
5437 2: @{
5438 3: if( doit )
5439 4: @{
5440 5: return( val + incr );
5441 6: @}
5442 7: return( val );
5443 8: @}
5444 @end group
5445 @end example
5446
5447 Notice how just changing the open brace offset on line 4 is all we
5448 needed to do. Since the other affected lines are indented relative to
5449 line 4, they are automatically indented the way you'd expect. For more
5450 complicated examples, this might not always work. The general approach
5451 to take is to always start adjusting offsets for lines higher up in the
5452 file, then reindent and see if any following lines need further
5453 adjustments.
5454
5455 @c Move this bit to "Styles" (2005/10/7)
5456 @deffn Command c-set-offset symbol offset
5457 @findex set-offset (c-)
5458 @kindex C-c C-o
5459 This is the command bound to @kbd{C-c C-o}. It provides a convenient
5460 way to set offsets on @code{c-offsets-alist} both interactively (see
5461 the example above) and from your mode hook.
5462
5463 It takes two arguments when used programmatically: @var{symbol} is the
5464 syntactic element symbol to change and @var{offset} is the new offset
5465 for that syntactic element.
5466 @end deffn
5467 @c End of MOVE THIS BIT.
5468
5469 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5470 @node Line-Up Functions, Custom Line-Up, Interactive Customization, Customizing Indentation
5471 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5472 @section Line-Up Functions
5473 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5474
5475 @cindex line-up function
5476 @cindex indentation function
5477 Often there are cases when a simple offset setting on a syntactic
5478 symbol isn't enough to get the desired indentation---for example, you
5479 might want to line up a closing parenthesis with the matching opening
5480 one rather than indenting relative to its ``anchor point''. @ccmode{}
5481 provides this flexibility with @dfn{line-up functions}.
5482
5483 The way you associate a line-up function with a syntactic symbol is
5484 described in @ref{c-offsets-alist}. @ccmode{} comes with many
5485 predefined line-up functions for common situations. If none of these
5486 does what you want, you can write your own. @xref{Custom Line-Up}.
5487 Sometimes, it is easier to tweak the standard indentation by adding a
5488 function to @code{c-special-indent-hook} (@pxref{Other Indentation}).
5489
5490 The line-up functions haven't been adapted for AWK buffers or tested
5491 with them. Some of them might work serendipitously. There shouldn't be
5492 any problems writing custom line-up functions for AWK mode.
5493
5494 The calling convention for line-up functions is described fully in
5495 @ref{Custom Line-Up}. Roughly speaking, the return value is either an
5496 offset itself (such as @code{+} or @code{[0]}) or it's @code{nil},
5497 meaning ``this function is inappropriate in this case; try a
5498 different one''. @xref{c-offsets-alist}.
5499
5500 The subsections below describe all the standard line-up functions,
5501 categorized by the sort of token the lining-up centers around. For
5502 each of these functions there is a ``works with'' list that indicates
5503 which syntactic symbols the function is intended to be used with.
5504
5505 @macro workswith
5506 @emph{Works with:@ }
5507 @end macro
5508 @ifinfo
5509 @unmacro workswith
5510 @macro workswith
5511 Works with:
5512 @end macro
5513 @end ifinfo
5514
5515 @macro sssTBasicOffset
5516 <--> @i{c-basic-offset}@c
5517 @end macro
5518
5519 @macro sssTsssTBasicOffset
5520 <--><--> @i{c-basic-offset}@c
5521 @end macro
5522
5523 @macro hereFn{func}
5524 <- @i{\func\}@c
5525 @end macro
5526
5527 @c The TeX backend seems to insert extra spaces around the argument. :P
5528 @iftex
5529 @unmacro hereFn
5530 @macro hereFn{func}
5531 <-@i{\func\}@c
5532 @end macro
5533 @end iftex
5534
5535 @menu
5536 * Brace/Paren Line-Up::
5537 * List Line-Up::
5538 * Operator Line-Up::
5539 * Comment Line-Up::
5540 * Misc Line-Up::
5541 @end menu
5542
5543 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5544 @node Brace/Paren Line-Up, List Line-Up, Line-Up Functions, Line-Up Functions
5545 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5546 @subsection Brace and Parenthesis Line-Up Functions
5547 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5548
5549 The line-up functions here calculate the indentation for braces,
5550 parentheses and statements within brace blocks.
5551
5552 @defun c-lineup-close-paren
5553 @findex lineup-close-paren (c-)
5554 Line up the closing paren under its corresponding open paren if the
5555 open paren is followed by code. If the open paren ends its line, no
5556 indentation is added. E.g.:
5557
5558 @example
5559 @group
5560 main (int,
5561 char **
5562 ) @hereFn{c-lineup-close-paren}
5563 @end group
5564 @end example
5565
5566 @noindent
5567 and
5568
5569 @example
5570 @group
5571 main (
5572 int, char **
5573 ) @hereFn{c-lineup-close-paren}
5574 @end group
5575 @end example
5576
5577 As a special case, if a brace block is opened at the same line as the
5578 open parenthesis of the argument list, the indentation is
5579 @code{c-basic-offset} instead of the open paren column. See
5580 @code{c-lineup-arglist} for further discussion of this ``DWIM'' measure.
5581
5582 @workswith All @code{*-close} symbols.
5583 @end defun
5584
5585 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5586
5587 @anchor{c-lineup-arglist-close-under-paren}
5588 @defun c-lineup-arglist-close-under-paren
5589 @findex lineup-arglist-close-under-paren (c-)
5590 Set your @code{arglist-close} syntactic symbol to this line-up function
5591 so that parentheses that close argument lists will line up under the
5592 parenthesis that opened the argument list. It can also be used with
5593 @code{arglist-cont} and @code{arglist-cont-nonempty} to line up all
5594 lines inside a parenthesis under the open paren.
5595
5596 As a special case, if a brace block is opened at the same line as the
5597 open parenthesis of the argument list, the indentation is
5598 @code{c-basic-offset} only. See @code{c-lineup-arglist} for further
5599 discussion of this ``DWIM'' measure.
5600
5601 @workswith Almost all symbols, but are typically most useful on
5602 @code{arglist-close}, @code{brace-list-close}, @code{arglist-cont} and
5603 @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}.
5604 @end defun
5605
5606 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5607
5608 @defun c-indent-one-line-block
5609 @findex indent-one-line-block (c-)
5610 Indent a one line block @code{c-basic-offset} extra. E.g.:
5611
5612 @example
5613 @group
5614 if (n > 0)
5615 @{m+=n; n=0;@} @hereFn{c-indent-one-line-block}
5616 @sssTBasicOffset{}
5617 @end group
5618 @end example
5619
5620 @noindent
5621 and
5622
5623 @example
5624 @group
5625 if (n > 0)
5626 @{ @hereFn{c-indent-one-line-block}
5627 m+=n; n=0;
5628 @}
5629 @end group
5630 @end example
5631
5632 The block may be surrounded by any kind of parenthesis characters.
5633 @code{nil} is returned if the line doesn't start with a one line block,
5634 which makes the function usable in list expressions.
5635
5636 @workswith Almost all syntactic symbols, but most useful on the
5637 @code{-open} symbols.
5638 @end defun
5639
5640 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5641
5642 @defun c-indent-multi-line-block
5643 @findex indent-multi-line-block (c-)
5644 Indent a multiline block @code{c-basic-offset} extra. E.g.:
5645
5646 @example
5647 @group
5648 int *foo[] = @{
5649 NULL,
5650 @{17@}, @hereFn{c-indent-multi-line-block}
5651 @end group
5652 @end example
5653
5654 @noindent
5655 and
5656
5657 @example
5658 @group
5659 int *foo[] = @{
5660 NULL,
5661 @{ @hereFn{c-indent-multi-line-block}
5662 17
5663 @},
5664 @sssTBasicOffset{}
5665 @end group
5666 @end example
5667
5668 The block may be surrounded by any kind of parenthesis characters.
5669 @code{nil} is returned if the line doesn't start with a multiline
5670 block, which makes the function usable in list expressions.
5671
5672 @workswith Almost all syntactic symbols, but most useful on the
5673 @code{-open} symbols.
5674 @end defun
5675
5676 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5677
5678 @defun c-lineup-runin-statements
5679 @findex lineup-runin-statements (c-)
5680 Line up statements for coding standards which place the first statement
5681 in a block on the same line as the block opening brace@footnote{Run-in
5682 style doesn't really work too well. You might need to write your own
5683 custom line-up functions to better support this style.}. E.g.:
5684
5685 @example
5686 @group
5687 int main()
5688 @{ puts ("Hello!");
5689 return 0; @hereFn{c-lineup-runin-statements}
5690 @}
5691 @end group
5692 @end example
5693
5694 If there is no statement after the opening brace to align with,
5695 @code{nil} is returned. This makes the function usable in list
5696 expressions.
5697
5698 @workswith The @code{statement} syntactic symbol.
5699 @end defun
5700
5701 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5702
5703 @defun c-lineup-inexpr-block
5704 @findex lineup-inexpr-block (c-)
5705 This can be used with the in-expression block symbols to indent the
5706 whole block to the column where the construct is started. E.g., for Java
5707 anonymous classes, this lines up the class under the @samp{new} keyword,
5708 and in Pike it lines up the lambda function body under the @samp{lambda}
5709 keyword. Returns @code{nil} if the block isn't part of such a
5710 construct.
5711
5712 @workswith @code{inlambda}, @code{inexpr-statement},
5713 @code{inexpr-class}.
5714 @end defun
5715
5716 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5717
5718 @defun c-lineup-after-whitesmith-blocks
5719 @findex lineup-after-whitesmith-blocks (c-)
5720 Compensate for Whitesmith style indentation of blocks. Due to the way
5721 @ccmode{} calculates anchor positions for normal lines inside blocks,
5722 this function is necessary for those lines to get correct Whitesmith
5723 style indentation. Consider the following examples:
5724
5725 @example
5726 @group
5727 int foo()
5728 @{
5729 a;
5730 x; @hereFn{c-lineup-after-whitesmith-blocks}
5731 @end group
5732 @end example
5733
5734 @example
5735 @group
5736 int foo()
5737 @{
5738 @{
5739 a;
5740 @}
5741 x; @hereFn{c-lineup-after-whitesmith-blocks}
5742 @end group
5743 @end example
5744
5745 The fact that the line with @code{x} is preceded by a Whitesmith style
5746 indented block in the latter case and not the first should not affect
5747 its indentation. But since CC Mode in cases like this uses the
5748 indentation of the preceding statement as anchor position, the @code{x}
5749 would in the second case be indented too much if the offset for
5750 @code{statement} was set simply to zero.
5751
5752 This lineup function corrects for this situation by detecting if the
5753 anchor position is at an open paren character. In that case, it instead
5754 indents relative to the surrounding block just like
5755 @code{c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block}.
5756
5757 @workswith @code{brace-list-entry}, @code{brace-entry-open},
5758 @code{statement}, @code{arglist-cont}.
5759 @end defun
5760
5761 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5762
5763 @defun c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block
5764 @findex lineup-whitesmith-in-block (c-)
5765 Line up lines inside a block in Whitesmith style. It's done in a way
5766 that works both when the opening brace hangs and when it doesn't. E.g.:
5767
5768 @example
5769 @group
5770 something
5771 @{
5772 foo; @hereFn{c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block}
5773 @}
5774 @end group
5775 @end example
5776
5777 @noindent
5778 and
5779
5780 @example
5781 @group
5782 something @{
5783 foo; @hereFn{c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block}
5784 @}
5785 @sssTBasicOffset{}
5786 @end group
5787 @end example
5788
5789 In the first case the indentation is kept unchanged, in the second
5790 @code{c-basic-offset} is added.
5791
5792 @workswith @code{defun-close}, @code{defun-block-intro},
5793 @code{inline-close}, @code{block-close}, @code{brace-list-close},
5794 @code{brace-list-intro}, @code{statement-block-intro},
5795 @code{arglist-intro}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty},
5796 @code{arglist-close}, and all @code{in*} symbols, e.g., @code{inclass}
5797 and @code{inextern-lang}.
5798 @end defun
5799
5800 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5801 @node List Line-Up, Operator Line-Up, Brace/Paren Line-Up, Line-Up Functions
5802 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5803 @subsection List Line-Up Functions
5804 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5805
5806 The line-up functions here calculate the indentation for lines which
5807 form lists of items, usually separated by commas.
5808
5809 The function @ref{c-lineup-arglist-close-under-paren}, which is mainly
5810 for indenting a close parenthesis, is also useful for the lines
5811 contained within parentheses.
5812
5813 @defun c-lineup-arglist
5814 @findex lineup-arglist (c-)
5815 Line up the current argument line under the first argument.
5816
5817 As a special case, if an argument on the same line as the open
5818 parenthesis starts with a brace block opener, the indentation is
5819 @code{c-basic-offset} only. This is intended as a ``DWIM'' measure in
5820 cases like macros that contain statement blocks, e.g.:
5821
5822 @example
5823 @group
5824 A_VERY_LONG_MACRO_NAME (@{
5825 some (code, with + long, lines * in[it]);
5826 @});
5827 @sssTBasicOffset{}
5828 @end group
5829 @end example
5830
5831 This is motivated partly because it's more in line with how code
5832 blocks are handled, and partly since it approximates the behavior of
5833 earlier CC Mode versions, which due to inaccurate analysis tended to
5834 indent such cases this way.
5835
5836 @workswith @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}, @code{arglist-close}.
5837 @end defun
5838
5839 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5840
5841 @defun c-lineup-arglist-intro-after-paren
5842 @findex lineup-arglist-intro-after-paren (c-)
5843 Line up a line to just after the open paren of the surrounding paren or
5844 brace block.
5845
5846 @workswith @code{defun-block-intro}, @code{brace-list-intro},
5847 @code{statement-block-intro}, @code{statement-case-intro},
5848 @code{arglist-intro}.
5849 @end defun
5850
5851 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5852
5853 @defun c-lineup-multi-inher
5854 @findex lineup-multi-inher (c-)
5855 Line up the classes in C++ multiple inheritance clauses and member
5856 initializers under each other. E.g.:
5857
5858 @example
5859 @group
5860 Foo::Foo (int a, int b):
5861 Cyphr (a),
5862 Bar (b) @hereFn{c-lineup-multi-inher}
5863 @end group
5864 @end example
5865
5866 @noindent
5867 and
5868
5869 @example
5870 @group
5871 class Foo
5872 : public Cyphr,
5873 public Bar @hereFn{c-lineup-multi-inher}
5874 @end group
5875 @end example
5876
5877 @noindent
5878 and
5879
5880 @example
5881 @group
5882 Foo::Foo (int a, int b)
5883 : Cyphr (a)
5884 , Bar (b) @hereFn{c-lineup-multi-inher}
5885 @end group
5886 @end example
5887
5888 @workswith @code{inher-cont}, @code{member-init-cont}.
5889 @end defun
5890
5891 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5892
5893 @defun c-lineup-java-inher
5894 @findex lineup-java-inher (c-)
5895 Line up Java implements and extends declarations. If class names
5896 follow on the same line as the @samp{implements}/@samp{extends}
5897 keyword, they are lined up under each other. Otherwise, they are
5898 indented by adding @code{c-basic-offset} to the column of the keyword.
5899 E.g.:
5900
5901 @example
5902 @group
5903 class Foo
5904 extends
5905 Bar @hereFn{c-lineup-java-inher}
5906 @sssTBasicOffset{}
5907 @end group
5908 @end example
5909
5910 @noindent
5911 and
5912
5913 @example
5914 @group
5915 class Foo
5916 extends Cyphr,
5917 Bar @hereFn{c-lineup-java-inher}
5918 @end group
5919 @end example
5920
5921 @workswith @code{inher-cont}.
5922 @end defun
5923
5924 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5925
5926 @defun c-lineup-java-throws
5927 @findex lineup-java-throws (c-)
5928 Line up Java throws declarations. If exception names follow on the
5929 same line as the throws keyword, they are lined up under each other.
5930 Otherwise, they are indented by adding @code{c-basic-offset} to the
5931 column of the @samp{throws} keyword. The @samp{throws} keyword itself
5932 is also indented by @code{c-basic-offset} from the function declaration
5933 start if it doesn't hang. E.g.:
5934
5935 @example
5936 @group
5937 int foo()
5938 throws @hereFn{c-lineup-java-throws}
5939 Bar @hereFn{c-lineup-java-throws}
5940 @sssTsssTBasicOffset{}
5941 @end group
5942 @end example
5943
5944 @noindent
5945 and
5946
5947 @example
5948 @group
5949 int foo() throws Cyphr,
5950 Bar, @hereFn{c-lineup-java-throws}
5951 Vlod @hereFn{c-lineup-java-throws}
5952 @end group
5953 @end example
5954
5955 @workswith @code{func-decl-cont}.
5956 @end defun
5957
5958 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5959
5960 @defun c-lineup-template-args
5961 @findex lineup-template-args (c-)
5962 Line up the arguments of a template argument list under each other, but
5963 only in the case where the first argument is on the same line as the
5964 opening @samp{<}.
5965
5966 To allow this function to be used in a list expression, @code{nil} is
5967 returned if there's no template argument on the first line.
5968
5969 @workswith @code{template-args-cont}.
5970 @end defun
5971
5972 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5973
5974 @defun c-lineup-ObjC-method-call
5975 @findex lineup-ObjC-method-call (c-)
5976 For Objective-C code, line up selector args as Emacs Lisp mode does
5977 with function args: go to the position right after the message receiver,
5978 and if you are at the end of the line, indent the current line
5979 c-basic-offset columns from the opening bracket; otherwise you are
5980 looking at the first character of the first method call argument, so
5981 lineup the current line with it.
5982
5983 @workswith @code{objc-method-call-cont}.
5984 @end defun
5985
5986 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5987
5988 @defun c-lineup-ObjC-method-args
5989 @findex lineup-ObjC-method-args (c-)
5990 For Objective-C code, line up the colons that separate args. The colon
5991 on the current line is aligned with the one on the first line.
5992
5993 @workswith @code{objc-method-args-cont}.
5994 @end defun
5995
5996 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5997
5998 @defun c-lineup-ObjC-method-args-2
5999 @findex lineup-ObjC-method-args-2 (c-)
6000 Similar to @code{c-lineup-ObjC-method-args} but lines up the colon on
6001 the current line with the colon on the previous line.
6002
6003 @workswith @code{objc-method-args-cont}.
6004 @end defun
6005
6006 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6007 @node Operator Line-Up, Comment Line-Up, List Line-Up, Line-Up Functions
6008 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6009 @subsection Operator Line-Up Functions
6010 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6011
6012 The line-up functions here calculate the indentation for lines which
6013 start with an operator, by lining it up with something on the previous
6014 line.
6015
6016 @defun c-lineup-argcont
6017 @findex lineup-argcont (c-)
6018 Line up a continued argument. E.g.:
6019
6020 @example
6021 @group
6022 foo (xyz, aaa + bbb + ccc
6023 + ddd + eee + fff); @hereFn{c-lineup-argcont}
6024 @end group
6025 @end example
6026
6027 Only continuation lines like this are touched, @code{nil} is returned on
6028 lines which are the start of an argument.
6029
6030 Within a gcc @code{asm} block, @code{:} is recognized as an argument
6031 separator, but of course only between operand specifications, not in the
6032 expressions for the operands.
6033
6034 @workswith @code{arglist-cont}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}.
6035 @end defun
6036
6037 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6038
6039 @defun c-lineup-arglist-operators
6040 @findex lineup-arglist-operators (c-)
6041 Line up lines starting with an infix operator under the open paren.
6042 Return @code{nil} on lines that don't start with an operator, to leave
6043 those cases to other line-up functions. Example:
6044
6045 @example
6046 @group
6047 if ( x < 10
6048 || at_limit (x, @hereFn{c-lineup-arglist-operators}
6049 list) @hereFn{c-lineup-arglist-operators@r{ returns nil}}
6050 )
6051 @end group
6052 @end example
6053
6054 Since this function doesn't do anything for lines without an infix
6055 operator you typically want to use it together with some other lineup
6056 settings, e.g., as follows (the @code{arglist-close} setting is just a
6057 suggestion to get a consistent style):
6058
6059 @example
6060 (c-set-offset 'arglist-cont
6061 '(c-lineup-arglist-operators 0))
6062 (c-set-offset 'arglist-cont-nonempty
6063 '(c-lineup-arglist-operators c-lineup-arglist))
6064 (c-set-offset 'arglist-close
6065 '(c-lineup-arglist-close-under-paren))
6066 @end example
6067
6068 @workswith @code{arglist-cont}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}.
6069 @end defun
6070
6071 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6072
6073 @defun c-lineup-assignments
6074 @findex lineup-assignments (c-)
6075 Line up the current line after the assignment operator on the first line
6076 in the statement. If there isn't any, return nil to allow stacking with
6077 other line-up functions. If the current line contains an assignment
6078 operator too, try to align it with the first one.
6079
6080 @workswith @code{topmost-intro-cont}, @code{statement-cont},
6081 @code{arglist-cont}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}.
6082
6083 @end defun
6084
6085 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6086
6087 @defun c-lineup-math
6088 @findex lineup-math (c-)
6089 Like @code{c-lineup-assignments} but indent with @code{c-basic-offset}
6090 if no assignment operator was found on the first line. I.e., this
6091 function is the same as specifying a list @code{(c-lineup-assignments
6092 +)}. It's provided for compatibility with old configurations.
6093
6094 @workswith @code{topmost-intro-cont}, @code{statement-cont},
6095 @code{arglist-cont}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}.
6096 @end defun
6097
6098 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6099
6100 @defun c-lineup-cascaded-calls
6101 @findex lineup-cascaded-calls (c-)
6102 Line up ``cascaded calls'' under each other. If the line begins with
6103 @code{->} or @code{.} and the preceding line ends with one or more
6104 function calls preceded by the same token, then the arrow is lined up
6105 with the first of those tokens. E.g.:
6106
6107 @example
6108 @group
6109 r = proc->add(17)->add(18)
6110 ->add(19) + @hereFn{c-lineup-cascaded-calls}
6111 offset; @hereFn{c-lineup-cascaded-calls@r{ (inactive)}}
6112 @end group
6113 @end example
6114
6115 In any other situation @code{nil} is returned to allow use in list
6116 expressions.
6117
6118 @workswith @code{topmost-intro-cont}, @code{statement-cont},
6119 @code{arglist-cont}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}.
6120 @end defun
6121
6122 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6123
6124 @defun c-lineup-streamop
6125 @findex lineup-streamop (c-)
6126 Line up C++ stream operators (i.e., @samp{<<} and @samp{>>}).
6127
6128 @workswith @code{stream-op}.
6129 @end defun
6130
6131 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6132
6133 @defun c-lineup-string-cont
6134 @findex lineup-string-cont (c-)
6135 Line up a continued string under the one it continues. A continued
6136 string in this sense is where a string literal follows directly after
6137 another one. E.g.:
6138
6139 @example
6140 @group
6141 result = prefix + "A message "
6142 "string."; @hereFn{c-lineup-string-cont}
6143 @end group
6144 @end example
6145
6146 @code{nil} is returned in other situations, to allow stacking with other
6147 lineup functions.
6148
6149 @workswith @code{topmost-intro-cont}, @code{statement-cont},
6150 @code{arglist-cont}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}.
6151 @end defun
6152
6153
6154 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6155 @node Comment Line-Up, Misc Line-Up, Operator Line-Up, Line-Up Functions
6156 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6157 @subsection Comment Line-Up Functions
6158 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6159
6160 The lineup functions here calculate the indentation for several types
6161 of comment structure.
6162
6163 @defun c-lineup-C-comments
6164 @findex lineup-C-comments (c-)
6165 Line up C block comment continuation lines. Various heuristics are used
6166 to handle most of the common comment styles. Some examples:
6167
6168 @example
6169 @group
6170 /* /** /*
6171 * text * text text
6172 */ */ */
6173 @end group
6174 @end example
6175
6176 @example
6177 @group
6178 /* text /* /**
6179 text ** text ** text
6180 */ */ */
6181 @end group
6182 @end example
6183
6184 @example
6185 @group
6186 /**************************************************
6187 * text
6188 *************************************************/
6189 @end group
6190 @end example
6191
6192 @vindex comment-start-skip
6193 @example
6194 @group
6195 /**************************************************
6196 Free form text comments:
6197 In comments with a long delimiter line at the
6198 start, the indentation is kept unchanged for lines
6199 that start with an empty comment line prefix. The
6200 delimiter line is whatever matches the
6201 @code{comment-start-skip} regexp.
6202 **************************************************/
6203 @end group
6204 @end example
6205
6206 The style variable @code{c-comment-prefix-regexp} is used to recognize
6207 the comment line prefix, e.g., the @samp{*} that usually starts every
6208 line inside a comment.
6209
6210 @workswith The @code{c} syntactic symbol.
6211 @end defun
6212
6213 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6214
6215 @defun c-lineup-comment
6216 @findex lineup-comment (c-)
6217 Line up a comment-only line according to the style variable
6218 @code{c-comment-only-line-offset}. If the comment is lined up with a
6219 comment starter on the previous line, that alignment is preserved.
6220
6221 @defopt c-comment-only-line-offset
6222 @vindex comment-only-line-offset (c-)
6223 This style variable specifies the extra offset for the line. It can
6224 contain an integer or a cons cell of the form
6225
6226 @example
6227 (@r{@var{non-anchored-offset}} . @r{@var{anchored-offset}})
6228 @end example
6229
6230 @noindent
6231 where @var{non-anchored-offset} is the amount of offset given to
6232 non-column-zero anchored lines, and @var{anchored-offset} is the amount
6233 of offset to give column-zero anchored lines. Just an integer as value
6234 is equivalent to @code{(@r{@var{value}} . -1000)}.
6235 @end defopt
6236
6237 @workswith @code{comment-intro}.
6238 @end defun
6239
6240 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6241
6242 @defun c-lineup-knr-region-comment
6243 @findex lineup-knr-region-comment (c-)
6244 Line up a comment in the ``K&R region'' with the declaration. That is
6245 the region between the function or class header and the beginning of the
6246 block. E.g.:
6247
6248 @example
6249 @group
6250 int main()
6251 /* Called at startup. */ @hereFn{c-lineup-knr-region-comment}
6252 @{
6253 return 0;
6254 @}
6255 @end group
6256 @end example
6257
6258 Return @code{nil} if called in any other situation, to be useful in list
6259 expressions.
6260
6261 @workswith @code{comment-intro}.
6262 @end defun
6263
6264 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6265 @node Misc Line-Up, , Comment Line-Up, Line-Up Functions
6266 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6267 @subsection Miscellaneous Line-Up Functions
6268 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6269
6270 The line-up functions here are the odds and ends which didn't fit into
6271 any earlier category.
6272
6273 @defun c-lineup-dont-change
6274 @findex lineup-dont-change (c-)
6275 This lineup function makes the line stay at whatever indentation it
6276 already has; think of it as an identity function for lineups.
6277
6278 @workswith Any syntactic symbol.
6279 @end defun
6280
6281 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6282
6283 @defun c-lineup-cpp-define
6284 @findex lineup-cpp-define (c-)
6285 Line up macro continuation lines according to the indentation of the
6286 construct preceding the macro. E.g.:
6287
6288 @example
6289 @group
6290 const char msg[] = @hereFn{@r{The beginning of the preceding construct.}}
6291 \"Some text.\";
6292
6293 #define X(A, B) \
6294 do @{ \ @hereFn{c-lineup-cpp-define}
6295 printf (A, B); \
6296 @} while (0)
6297 @end group
6298 @end example
6299
6300 @noindent
6301 and:
6302
6303 @example
6304 @group
6305 int dribble() @{
6306 if (!running) @hereFn{@r{The beginning of the preceding construct.}}
6307 error(\"Not running!\");
6308
6309 #define X(A, B) \
6310 do @{ \ @hereFn{c-lineup-cpp-define}
6311 printf (A, B); \
6312 @} while (0)
6313 @end group
6314 @end example
6315
6316 If @code{c-syntactic-indentation-in-macros} is non-@code{nil}, the
6317 function returns the relative indentation to the macro start line to
6318 allow accumulation with other offsets. E.g., in the following cases,
6319 @code{cpp-define-intro} is combined with the
6320 @code{statement-block-intro} that comes from the @samp{do @{} that hangs
6321 on the @samp{#define} line:
6322
6323 @example
6324 @group
6325 const char msg[] =
6326 \"Some text.\";
6327
6328 #define X(A, B) do @{ \
6329 printf (A, B); \ @hereFn{c-lineup-cpp-define}
6330 this->refs++; \
6331 @} while (0) @hereFn{c-lineup-cpp-define}
6332 @end group
6333 @end example
6334
6335 @noindent
6336 and:
6337
6338 @example
6339 @group
6340 int dribble() @{
6341 if (!running)
6342 error(\"Not running!\");
6343
6344 #define X(A, B) do @{ \
6345 printf (A, B); \ @hereFn{c-lineup-cpp-define}
6346 this->refs++; \
6347 @} while (0) @hereFn{c-lineup-cpp-define}
6348 @end group
6349 @end example
6350
6351 The relative indentation returned by @code{c-lineup-cpp-define} is zero
6352 and two, respectively, on the two lines in each of these examples. They
6353 are then added to the two column indentation that
6354 @code{statement-block-intro} gives in both cases here.
6355
6356 If the relative indentation is zero, then @code{nil} is returned
6357 instead. That is useful in a list expression to specify the default
6358 indentation on the top level.
6359
6360 If @code{c-syntactic-indentation-in-macros} is @code{nil} then this
6361 function keeps the current indentation, except for empty lines (ignoring
6362 the ending backslash) where it takes the indentation from the closest
6363 preceding nonempty line in the macro. If there's no such line in the
6364 macro then the indentation is taken from the construct preceding it, as
6365 described above.
6366
6367 @workswith @code{cpp-define-intro}.
6368 @end defun
6369
6370 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6371
6372 @defun c-lineup-gcc-asm-reg
6373 @findex lineup-gcc-asm-reg (c-)
6374 Line up a gcc asm register under one on a previous line.
6375
6376 @example
6377 @group
6378 asm ("foo %1, %0\n"
6379 "bar %0, %1"
6380 : "=r" (w),
6381 "=r" (x)
6382 : "0" (y),
6383 "1" (z));
6384 @end group
6385 @end example
6386
6387 The @samp{x} line is aligned to the text after the @samp{:} on the
6388 @samp{w} line, and similarly @samp{z} under @samp{y}.
6389
6390 This is done only in an @samp{asm} or @samp{__asm__} block, and only to
6391 those lines mentioned. Anywhere else @code{nil} is returned. The usual
6392 arrangement is to have this routine as an extra feature at the start of
6393 arglist lineups, e.g.:
6394
6395 @example
6396 (c-lineup-gcc-asm-reg c-lineup-arglist)
6397 @end example
6398
6399 @workswith @code{arglist-cont}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}.
6400 @end defun
6401
6402 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6403
6404 @defun c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont
6405 @findex lineup-topmost-intro-cont (c-)
6406 Line up declaration continuation lines zero or one indentation
6407 step@footnote{This function is mainly provided to mimic the behavior of
6408 CC Mode 5.28 and earlier where this case wasn't handled consistently so
6409 that those lines could be analyzed as either topmost-intro-cont or
6410 statement-cont. It's used for @code{topmost-intro-cont} by default, but
6411 you might consider using @code{+} instead.}. For lines preceding a
6412 definition, zero is used. For other lines, @code{c-basic-offset} is
6413 added to the indentation. E.g.:
6414
6415 @example
6416 @group
6417 int
6418 neg (int i) @hereFn{c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont}
6419 @{
6420 return -i;
6421 @}
6422 @end group
6423 @end example
6424
6425 @noindent
6426 and
6427
6428 @example
6429 @group
6430 struct
6431 larch @hereFn{c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont}
6432 @{
6433 double height;
6434 @}
6435 the_larch, @hereFn{c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont}
6436 another_larch; @hereFn{c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont}
6437 @sssTBasicOffset{}
6438 @end group
6439 @end example
6440
6441 @noindent
6442 and
6443
6444 @example
6445 @group
6446 struct larch
6447 the_larch, @hereFn{c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont}
6448 another_larch; @hereFn{c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont}
6449 @end group
6450 @end example
6451
6452 @workswith @code{topmost-intro-cont}.
6453 @end defun
6454
6455 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6456 @node Custom Line-Up, Other Indentation, Line-Up Functions, Customizing Indentation
6457 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6458 @section Custom Line-Up Functions
6459 @cindex customization, indentation functions
6460 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6461
6462 The most flexible way to customize indentation is by writing custom
6463 line-up functions, and associating them with specific syntactic
6464 symbols (@pxref{c-offsets-alist}). Depending on the effect you want,
6465 it might be better to write a @code{c-special-indent-hook} function
6466 rather than a line-up function (@pxref{Other Indentation}).
6467
6468 @ccmode{} comes with an extensive set of predefined line-up functions,
6469 not all of which are used by the default styles. So there's a good
6470 chance the function you want already exists. @xref{Line-Up
6471 Functions}, for a list of them. If you write your own line-up
6472 function, it's probably a good idea to start working from one of these
6473 predefined functions, which can be found in the file
6474 @file{cc-align.el}. If you have written a line-up function that you
6475 think is generally useful, you're very welcome to contribute it;
6476 please contact @email{bug-cc-mode@@gnu.org}.
6477
6478 Line-up functions are passed a single argument, the syntactic
6479 element (see below). At the time of the call, point will be somewhere
6480 on the line being indented. The return value is a
6481 @code{c-offsets-alist} offset specification: for example, an integer,
6482 a symbol such as @code{+}, a vector, @code{nil}@footnote{Returning
6483 @code{nil} is useful when the offset specification for a syntactic
6484 element is a list containing the line-up function
6485 (@pxref{c-offsets-alist}).}, or even another line-up function. Full
6486 details of these are in @ref{c-offsets-alist}.
6487
6488 Line-up functions must not move point or change the content of the
6489 buffer (except temporarily). They are however allowed to do
6490 @dfn{hidden buffer changes}, i.e., setting text properties for caching
6491 purposes etc. Buffer undo recording is disabled while they run.
6492
6493 The syntactic element passed as the parameter to a line-up function is
6494 a cons cell of the form
6495
6496 @example
6497 (@r{@var{syntactic-symbol}} . @r{@var{anchor-position}})
6498 @end example
6499
6500 @noindent
6501 @c FIXME!!! The following sentence might be better omitted, since the
6502 @c information is in the cross reference "Syntactic Analysis". 2005/10/2.
6503 where @var{syntactic-symbol} is the symbol that the function was
6504 called for, and @var{anchor-position} is the anchor position (if any)
6505 for the construct that triggered the syntactic symbol
6506 (@pxref{Syntactic Analysis}). This cons cell is how the syntactic
6507 element of a line used to be represented in @ccmode{} 5.28 and
6508 earlier. Line-up functions are still passed this cons cell, so as to
6509 preserve compatibility with older configurations. In the future, we
6510 may decide to convert to using the full list format---you can prepare
6511 your setup for this by using the access functions
6512 (@code{c-langelem-sym}, etc.)@: described below.
6513
6514 @vindex c-syntactic-element
6515 @vindex syntactic-element (c-)
6516 @vindex c-syntactic-context
6517 @vindex syntactic-context (c-)
6518 Some syntactic symbols, e.g., @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}, have more
6519 info in the syntactic element: typically other positions that can be
6520 interesting besides the anchor position. That info can't be accessed
6521 through the passed argument, which is a cons cell. Instead, you can
6522 get this information from the variable @code{c-syntactic-element},
6523 which is dynamically bound to the complete syntactic element. The
6524 variable @code{c-syntactic-context} might also be useful: it gets
6525 dynamically bound to the complete syntactic context. @xref{Custom
6526 Braces}.
6527
6528 @ccmode{} provides a few functions to access parts of syntactic
6529 elements in a more abstract way. Besides making the code easier to
6530 read, they also hide the difference between the old cons cell form
6531 used in the line-up function argument and the new list form used in
6532 @code{c-syntactic-element} and everywhere else. The functions are:
6533
6534 @defun c-langelem-sym langelem
6535 @findex langelem-sym (c-)
6536 Return the syntactic symbol in @var{langelem}.
6537 @end defun
6538
6539 @defun c-langelem-pos langelem
6540 @findex langelem-pos (c-)
6541 Return the anchor position in @var{langelem}, or nil if there is none.
6542 @end defun
6543
6544 @defun c-langelem-col langelem &optional preserve-point
6545 @findex langelem-col (c-)
6546 Return the column of the anchor position in @var{langelem}. Also move
6547 the point to that position unless @var{preserve-point} is
6548 non-@code{nil}.
6549 @end defun
6550
6551 @defun c-langelem-2nd-pos langelem
6552 @findex langelem-2nd-pos (c-)
6553 Return the secondary position in @var{langelem}, or @code{nil} if there
6554 is none.
6555
6556 Note that the return value of this function is always @code{nil} if
6557 @var{langelem} is in the old cons cell form. Thus this function is
6558 only meaningful when used on syntactic elements taken from
6559 @code{c-syntactic-element} or @code{c-syntactic-context}.
6560 @end defun
6561
6562 Custom line-up functions can be as simple or as complex as you like, and
6563 any syntactic symbol that appears in @code{c-offsets-alist} can have a
6564 custom line-up function associated with it.
6565
6566 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6567 @node Other Indentation, , Custom Line-Up, Customizing Indentation
6568 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6569 @section Other Special Indentations
6570 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6571
6572 To configure macros which you invoke without a terminating @samp{;},
6573 see @xref{Macros with ;}.
6574
6575 Here are the remaining odds and ends regarding indentation:
6576
6577 @defopt c-label-minimum-indentation
6578 @vindex label-minimum-indentation (c-)
6579 In @samp{gnu} style (@pxref{Built-in Styles}), a minimum indentation is
6580 imposed on lines inside code blocks. This minimum indentation is
6581 controlled by this style variable. The default value is 1.
6582
6583 @findex c-gnu-impose-minimum
6584 @findex gnu-impose-minimum (c-)
6585 It's the function @code{c-gnu-impose-minimum} that enforces this minimum
6586 indentation. It must be present on @code{c-special-indent-hook} to
6587 work.
6588 @end defopt
6589
6590 @defopt c-special-indent-hook
6591 @vindex special-indent-hook (c-)
6592 This style variable is a standard hook variable that is called after
6593 every line is indented by @ccmode{}. It is called only if
6594 @code{c-syntactic-indentation} is non-@code{nil} (which it is by
6595 default (@pxref{Indentation Engine Basics})). You can put a function
6596 on this hook to do any special indentation or ad hoc line adjustments
6597 your style dictates, such as adding extra indentation to constructors
6598 or destructor declarations in a class definition, etc. Sometimes it
6599 is better to write a custom Line-up Function instead (@pxref{Custom
6600 Line-Up}).
6601
6602 When the indentation engine calls this hook, the variable
6603 @code{c-syntactic-context} is bound to the current syntactic context
6604 (i.e., what you would get by typing @kbd{C-c C-s} on the source line.
6605 @xref{Custom Braces}.). Note that you should not change point or mark
6606 inside a @code{c-special-indent-hook} function, i.e., you'll probably
6607 want to wrap your function in a @code{save-excursion}@footnote{The
6608 numerical value returned by @code{point} will change if you change the
6609 indentation of the line within a @code{save-excursion} form, but point
6610 itself will still be over the same piece of text.}.
6611
6612 Setting @code{c-special-indent-hook} in style definitions is handled
6613 slightly differently from other variables---A style can only add
6614 functions to this hook, not remove them. @xref{Style Variables}.
6615 @end defopt
6616
6617
6618 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6619 @node Custom Macros, Odds and Ends, Customizing Indentation, Top
6620 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6621 @chapter Customizing Macros
6622 @cindex macros
6623 @cindex preprocessor directives
6624 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6625
6626 Preprocessor macros in C, C++, and Objective C (introduced by
6627 @code{#define}) have a syntax different from the main language---for
6628 example, a macro declaration is not terminated by a semicolon, and if
6629 it is more than a line long, line breaks in it must be escaped with
6630 backslashes. @ccmode{} has some commands to manipulate these, see
6631 @ref{Macro Backslashes}.
6632
6633 Normally, the lines in a multi-line macro are indented relative to
6634 each other as though they were code. You can suppress this behavior
6635 by setting the following user option:
6636
6637 @defopt c-syntactic-indentation-in-macros
6638 @vindex syntactic-indentation-in-macros (c-)
6639 Enable syntactic analysis inside macros, which is the default. If this
6640 is @code{nil}, all lines inside macro definitions are analyzed as
6641 @code{cpp-macro-cont}.
6642 @end defopt
6643
6644 Because a macro can expand into anything at all, near where one is
6645 invoked @ccmode{} can only indent and fontify code heuristically.
6646 Sometimes it gets it wrong. Usually you should try to design your
6647 macros so that they ''look like ordinary code'' when you invoke them.
6648 However, one situation is so common that @ccmode{} handles it
6649 specially: that is when certain macros needn't (or mustn't) be
6650 followed by a @samp{;}. You need to configure @ccmode{} to handle
6651 these macros properly, see @ref{Macros with ;}.
6652
6653 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6654 @menu
6655 * Macro Backslashes::
6656 * Macros with ;::
6657 @end menu
6658
6659 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6660 @node Macro Backslashes, Macros with ;, Custom Macros, Custom Macros
6661 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6662 @section Customizing Macro Backslashes
6663 @cindex @code{#define}
6664 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6665
6666 @ccmode{} provides some tools to help keep the line continuation
6667 backslashes in macros neat and tidy. Their precise action is
6668 customized with these variables:
6669
6670 @defopt c-backslash-column
6671 @vindex backslash-column (c-)
6672 @defoptx c-backslash-max-column
6673 @vindex backslash-max-column (c-)
6674 These variables control the alignment columns for line continuation
6675 backslashes in multiline macros. They are used by the functions that
6676 automatically insert or align such backslashes,
6677 e.g., @code{c-backslash-region} and @code{c-context-line-break}.
6678
6679 @code{c-backslash-column} specifies the minimum column for the
6680 backslashes. If any line in the macro goes past this column, then the
6681 next tab stop (i.e., next multiple of @code{tab-width}) in that line is
6682 used as the alignment column for all the backslashes, so that they
6683 remain in a single column. However, if any lines go past
6684 @code{c-backslash-max-column} then the backslashes in the rest of the
6685 macro will be kept at that column, so that the lines which are too
6686 long ``stick out'' instead.
6687
6688 Don't ever set these variables to @code{nil}. If you want to disable
6689 the automatic alignment of backslashes, use
6690 @code{c-auto-align-backslashes}.
6691 @end defopt
6692
6693 @defopt c-auto-align-backslashes
6694 @vindex auto-align-backslashes (c-)
6695 Align automatically inserted line continuation backslashes if
6696 non-@code{nil}. When line continuation backslashes are inserted
6697 automatically for line breaks in multiline macros, e.g., by
6698 @code{c-context-line-break}, they are aligned with the other
6699 backslashes in the same macro if this flag is set.
6700
6701 If @code{c-auto-align-backslashes} is @code{nil}, automatically
6702 inserted backslashes are preceded by a single space, and backslashes
6703 get aligned only when you explicitly invoke the command
6704 @code{c-backslash-region} (@kbd{C-c C-\}).
6705 @end defopt
6706
6707 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6708 @node Macros with ;, , Macro Backslashes, Custom Macros
6709 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6710 @section Macros with semicolons
6711 @cindex macros with semicolons
6712 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6713 Macros which needn't (or mustn't) be followed by a semicolon when you
6714 invoke them, @dfn{macros with semicolons}, are very common. These can
6715 cause @ccmode{} to parse the next line wrongly as a
6716 @code{statement-cont} (@pxref{Function Symbols}) and thus mis-indent
6717 it.
6718
6719 You can prevent this by specifying which macros have semicolons. It
6720 doesn't matter whether or not such a macro has a parameter list:
6721
6722 @defopt c-macro-names-with-semicolon
6723 @vindex macro-names-with-semicolon (c-)
6724 This buffer-local variable specifies which macros have semicolons.
6725 After setting its value, you need to call
6726 @code{c-make-macro-with-semi-re} for it to take effect. It should be
6727 set to one of these values:
6728
6729 @table @asis
6730 @item nil
6731 There are no macros with semicolons.
6732 @item a list of strings
6733 Each string is the name of a macro with a semicolon. Only valid
6734 @code{#define} names are allowed here. For example, to set the
6735 default value, you could write the following into your @file{.emacs}:
6736
6737 @example
6738 (setq c-macro-names-with-semicolon
6739 '("Q_OBJECT" "Q_PROPERTY" "Q_DECLARE" "Q_ENUMS"))
6740 @end example
6741
6742 @item a regular expression
6743 This matches each symbol which is a macro with a semicolon. It must
6744 not match any string which isn't a valid @code{#define} name. For
6745 example:
6746
6747 @example
6748 (setq c-macro-names-with-semicolon
6749 "\\<\\(CLEAN_UP_AND_RETURN\\|Q_[[:upper:]]+\\)\\>")
6750 @end example
6751 @end table
6752 @end defopt
6753
6754 @defun c-make-macro-with-semi-re
6755 @findex make-macro-with-semi-re (c-)
6756 Call this (non-interactive) function, which sets internal variables,
6757 each time you change the value of
6758 @code{c-macro-names-with-semicolon}. It takes no arguments, and its
6759 return value has no meaning. This function is called by @ccmode{}'s
6760 initialization code.
6761 @end defun
6762
6763 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6764 @node Odds and Ends, Sample Init File, Custom Macros, Top
6765 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6766 @chapter Odds and Ends
6767 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6768
6769 The stuff that didn't fit in anywhere else is documented here.
6770
6771 @defopt c-require-final-newline
6772 @vindex require-final-newline (c-)
6773 Controls whether a final newline is enforced when the file is saved.
6774 The value is an association list that for each language mode specifies
6775 the value to give to @code{require-final-newline} (@pxref{Saving
6776 Buffers,,,@lispref{}, @lispreftitle{}}) at mode initialization. If a
6777 language isn't present on the association list, CC Mode won't touch
6778 @code{require-final-newline} in buffers for that language.
6779
6780 The default is to set @code{require-final-newline} to @code{t} in the
6781 languages that mandate that source files should end with newlines.
6782 These are C, C++ and Objective-C.
6783 @end defopt
6784
6785 @defopt c-echo-syntactic-information-p
6786 @vindex echo-syntactic-information-p (c-)
6787 If non-@code{nil}, the syntactic analysis for the current line is shown
6788 in the echo area when it's indented (unless
6789 @code{c-syntactic-indentation} is @code{nil}). That's useful when
6790 finding out which syntactic symbols to modify to get the indentation you
6791 want.
6792 @end defopt
6793
6794 @defopt c-report-syntactic-errors
6795 @vindex report-syntactic-errors (c-)
6796 If non-@code{nil}, certain syntactic errors are reported with a ding and
6797 a message, for example when an @code{else} is indented for which there
6798 is no corresponding @code{if}.
6799
6800 Note however that @ccmode{} doesn't make any special effort to check for
6801 syntactic errors; that's the job of the compiler. The reason it can
6802 report cases like the one above is that it can't find the correct
6803 anchoring position to indent the line in that case.
6804 @end defopt
6805
6806
6807 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6808 @node Sample Init File, Performance Issues, Odds and Ends, Top
6809 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6810 @appendix Sample Init File
6811 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6812
6813 Here's a sample .emacs file fragment that might help you along the way.
6814 Just copy this region and paste it into your .emacs file. You might want
6815 to change some of the actual values.
6816
6817 @verbatim
6818 ;; Make a non-standard key binding. We can put this in
6819 ;; c-mode-base-map because c-mode-map, c++-mode-map, and so on,
6820 ;; inherit from it.
6821 (defun my-c-initialization-hook ()
6822 (define-key c-mode-base-map "\C-m" 'c-context-line-break))
6823 (add-hook 'c-initialization-hook 'my-c-initialization-hook)
6824
6825 ;; offset customizations not in my-c-style
6826 ;; This will take precedence over any setting of the syntactic symbol
6827 ;; made by a style.
6828 (setq c-offsets-alist '((member-init-intro . ++)))
6829
6830 ;; Create my personal style.
6831 (defconst my-c-style
6832 '((c-tab-always-indent . t)
6833 (c-comment-only-line-offset . 4)
6834 (c-hanging-braces-alist . ((substatement-open after)
6835 (brace-list-open)))
6836 (c-hanging-colons-alist . ((member-init-intro before)
6837 (inher-intro)
6838 (case-label after)
6839 (label after)
6840 (access-label after)))
6841 (c-cleanup-list . (scope-operator
6842 empty-defun-braces
6843 defun-close-semi))
6844 (c-offsets-alist . ((arglist-close . c-lineup-arglist)
6845 (substatement-open . 0)
6846 (case-label . 4)
6847 (block-open . 0)
6848 (knr-argdecl-intro . -)))
6849 (c-echo-syntactic-information-p . t))
6850 "My C Programming Style")
6851 (c-add-style "PERSONAL" my-c-style)
6852
6853 ;; Customizations for all modes in CC Mode.
6854 (defun my-c-mode-common-hook ()
6855 ;; set my personal style for the current buffer
6856 (c-set-style "PERSONAL")
6857 ;; other customizations
6858 (setq tab-width 8
6859 ;; this will make sure spaces are used instead of tabs
6860 indent-tabs-mode nil)
6861 ;; we like auto-newline, but not hungry-delete
6862 (c-toggle-auto-newline 1))
6863 (add-hook 'c-mode-common-hook 'my-c-mode-common-hook)
6864 @end verbatim
6865
6866 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6867 @node Performance Issues, Limitations and Known Bugs, Sample Init File, Top
6868 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6869 @chapter Performance Issues
6870 @cindex performance
6871 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6872
6873 @comment FIXME: (ACM, 2003/5/24). Check whether AWK needs mentioning here.
6874
6875 C and its derivative languages are highly complex creatures. Often,
6876 ambiguous code situations arise that require @ccmode{} to scan large
6877 portions of the buffer to determine syntactic context. Such
6878 pathological code can cause @ccmode{} to perform fairly badly. This
6879 section gives some insight in how @ccmode{} operates, how that interacts
6880 with some coding styles, and what you can use to improve performance.
6881
6882 The overall goal is that @ccmode{} shouldn't be overly slow (i.e., take
6883 more than a fraction of a second) in any interactive operation.
6884 I.e., it's tuned to limit the maximum response time in single operations,
6885 which is sometimes at the expense of batch-like operations like
6886 reindenting whole blocks. If you find that @ccmode{} gradually gets
6887 slower and slower in certain situations, perhaps as the file grows in
6888 size or as the macro or comment you're editing gets bigger, then chances
6889 are that something isn't working right. You should consider reporting
6890 it, unless it's something that's mentioned in this section.
6891
6892 Because @ccmode{} has to scan the buffer backwards from the current
6893 insertion point, and because C's syntax is fairly difficult to parse in
6894 the backwards direction, @ccmode{} often tries to find the nearest
6895 position higher up in the buffer from which to begin a forward scan
6896 (it's typically an opening or closing parenthesis of some kind). The
6897 farther this position is from the current insertion point, the slower it
6898 gets.
6899
6900 @findex beginning-of-defun
6901 In earlier versions of @ccmode{}, we used to recommend putting the
6902 opening brace of a top-level construct@footnote{E.g., a function in C,
6903 or outermost class definition in C++ or Java.} into the leftmost
6904 column. Earlier still, this used to be a rigid Emacs constraint, as
6905 embodied in the @code{beginning-of-defun} function. @ccmode now
6906 caches syntactic information much better, so that the delay caused by
6907 searching for such a brace when it's not in column 0 is minimal,
6908 except perhaps when you've just moved a long way inside the file.
6909
6910 @findex defun-prompt-regexp
6911 @vindex c-Java-defun-prompt-regexp
6912 @vindex Java-defun-prompt-regexp (c-)
6913 A special note about @code{defun-prompt-regexp} in Java mode: The common
6914 style is to hang the opening braces of functions and classes on the
6915 right side of the line, and that doesn't work well with the Emacs
6916 approach. @ccmode{} comes with a constant
6917 @code{c-Java-defun-prompt-regexp} which tries to define a regular
6918 expression usable for this style, but there are problems with it. In
6919 some cases it can cause @code{beginning-of-defun} to hang@footnote{This
6920 has been observed in Emacs 19.34 and XEmacs 19.15.}. For this reason,
6921 it is not used by default, but if you feel adventurous, you can set
6922 @code{defun-prompt-regexp} to it in your mode hook. In any event,
6923 setting and relying on @code{defun-prompt-regexp} will definitely slow
6924 things down because (X)Emacs will be doing regular expression searches a
6925 lot, so you'll probably be taking a hit either way!
6926
6927 @ccmode{} maintains a cache of the opening parentheses of the blocks
6928 surrounding the point, and it adapts that cache as the point is moved
6929 around. That means that in bad cases it can take noticeable time to
6930 indent a line in a new surrounding, but after that it gets fast as long
6931 as the point isn't moved far off. The farther the point is moved, the
6932 less useful is the cache. Since editing typically is done in ``chunks''
6933 rather than on single lines far apart from each other, the cache
6934 typically gives good performance even when the code doesn't fit the
6935 Emacs approach to finding the defun starts.
6936
6937 @vindex c-enable-xemacs-performance-kludge-p
6938 @vindex enable-xemacs-performance-kludge-p (c-)
6939 XEmacs users can set the variable
6940 @code{c-enable-xemacs-performance-kludge-p} to non-@code{nil}. This
6941 tells @ccmode{} to use XEmacs-specific built-in functions which, in some
6942 circumstances, can locate the top-most opening brace much more quickly than
6943 @code{beginning-of-defun}. Preliminary testing has shown that for
6944 styles where these braces are hung (e.g., most JDK-derived Java styles),
6945 this hack can improve performance of the core syntax parsing routines
6946 from 3 to 60 times. However, for styles which @emph{do} conform to
6947 Emacs's recommended style of putting top-level braces in column zero,
6948 this hack can degrade performance by about as much. Thus this variable
6949 is set to @code{nil} by default, since the Emacs-friendly styles should
6950 be more common (and encouraged!). Note that this variable has no effect
6951 in Emacs since the necessary built-in functions don't exist (in Emacs
6952 22.1 as of this writing in February 2007).
6953
6954 Text properties are used to speed up skipping over syntactic whitespace,
6955 i.e., comments and preprocessor directives. Indenting a line after a
6956 huge macro definition can be slow the first time, but after that the
6957 text properties are in place and it should be fast (even after you've
6958 edited other parts of the file and then moved back).
6959
6960 Font locking can be a CPU hog, especially the font locking done on
6961 decoration level 3 which tries to be very accurate. Note that that
6962 level is designed to be used with a font lock support mode that only
6963 fontifies the text that's actually shown, i.e., Lazy Lock or Just-in-time
6964 Lock mode, so make sure you use one of them. Fontification of a whole
6965 buffer with some thousand lines can often take over a minute. That is
6966 a known weakness; the idea is that it never should happen.
6967
6968 The most effective way to speed up font locking is to reduce the
6969 decoration level to 2 by setting @code{font-lock-maximum-decoration}
6970 appropriately. That level is designed to be as pretty as possible
6971 without sacrificing performance. @xref{Font Locking Preliminaries}, for
6972 more info.
6973
6974
6975 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6976 @node Limitations and Known Bugs, FAQ, Performance Issues, Top
6977 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6978 @chapter Limitations and Known Bugs
6979 @cindex limitations
6980 @cindex bugs
6981 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6982
6983 @itemize @bullet
6984 @item
6985 @ccmode{} doesn't support trigraphs. (These are character sequences
6986 such as @samp{??(}, which represents @samp{[}. They date from a time
6987 when some character sets didn't have all the characters that C needs,
6988 and are now utterly obsolete.)
6989
6990 @item
6991 There is no way to apply auto newline settings (@pxref{Auto-newlines})
6992 on already typed lines. That's only a feature to ease interactive
6993 editing.
6994
6995 To generalize this issue a bit: @ccmode{} is not intended to be used as
6996 a reformatter for old code in some more or less batch-like way. With
6997 the exception of some functions like @code{c-indent-region}, it's only
6998 geared to be used interactively to edit new code. There's currently no
6999 intention to change this goal.
7000
7001 If you want to reformat old code, you're probably better off using some
7002 other tool instead, e.g., @ref{Top, , GNU indent, indent, The `indent'
7003 Manual}, which has more powerful reformatting capabilities than
7004 @ccmode{}.
7005
7006 @item
7007 The support for C++ templates (in angle brackets) is not yet complete.
7008 When a non-nested template is used in a declaration, @ccmode{} indents
7009 it and font-locks it OK@. Templates used in expressions, and nested
7010 templates do not fare so well. Sometimes a workaround is to refontify
7011 the expression after typing the closing @samp{>}.
7012
7013 @item
7014 In a @dfn{k&r region} (the part of an old-fashioned C function
7015 declaration which specifies the types of its parameters, coming
7016 between the parameter list and the opening brace), there should be at
7017 most 20 top-level parenthesis and bracket pairs. This limit has been
7018 imposed for performance reasons. If it is violated, the source file
7019 might be incorrectly indented or fontified.
7020
7021 @item
7022 On loading @ccmode{}, sometimes this error message appears:
7023
7024 @example
7025 File mode specification error: (void-variable c-font-lock-keywords-3)
7026 @end example
7027
7028 This is due to a bug in the function @code{eval-after-load} in some
7029 versions of (X)Emacs. It can manifest itself when there is a symbolic
7030 link in the path of the directory which contains (X)Emacs. As a
7031 workaround, put the following into your @file{.emacs} file, fairly
7032 early on:
7033
7034 @example
7035 (defun my-load-cc-fonts ()
7036 (require "cc-fonts"))
7037 (add-hook 'c-initialization-hook 'my-load-cc-fonts)
7038 @end example
7039 @end itemize
7040
7041 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7042 @node FAQ, Updating CC Mode, Limitations and Known Bugs, Top
7043 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7044 @appendix Frequently Asked Questions
7045 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7046
7047 @itemize @bullet
7048 @item
7049 @emph{How can I change the indent level from 4 spaces to 2 spaces?}
7050
7051 Set the variable @code{c-basic-offset}. @xref{Getting Started}.
7052
7053 @item
7054 @kindex RET
7055 @kindex C-j
7056 @emph{Why doesn't the @kbd{RET} key indent the new line?}
7057
7058 Emacs's convention is that @kbd{RET} just adds a newline, and that
7059 @kbd{C-j} adds a newline and indents it. You can make @kbd{RET} do this
7060 too by adding this to your @code{c-initialization-hook}:
7061
7062 @example
7063 (define-key c-mode-base-map "\C-m" 'c-context-line-break)
7064 @end example
7065
7066 @xref{Getting Started}. This is a very common question. If you want
7067 this to be the default behavior, don't lobby us, lobby RMS@! @t{:-)}
7068
7069 @item
7070 @emph{How do I stop my code jumping all over the place when I type?}
7071
7072 Deactivate ``electric minor mode'' with @kbd{C-c C-l}. @xref{Getting
7073 Started}.
7074
7075 @item
7076 @kindex C-x h
7077 @kindex C-M-\
7078 @emph{How do I reindent the whole file?}
7079
7080 Visit the file and hit @kbd{C-x h} to mark the whole buffer. Then hit
7081 @kbd{C-M-\}. @xref{Indentation Commands}.
7082
7083 @item
7084 @kindex C-M-q
7085 @kindex C-M-u
7086 @emph{How do I reindent the current block?}
7087
7088 First move to the brace which opens the block with @kbd{C-M-u}, then
7089 reindent that expression with @kbd{C-M-q}. @xref{Indentation
7090 Commands}.
7091
7092 @item
7093 @emph{I put @code{(c-set-offset 'substatement-open 0)} in my
7094 @file{.emacs} file but I get an error saying that @code{c-set-offset}'s
7095 function definition is void. What's wrong?}
7096
7097 This means that @ccmode{} hasn't yet been loaded into your Emacs
7098 session by the time the @code{c-set-offset} call is reached, most
7099 likely because @ccmode{} is being autoloaded. Instead of putting the
7100 @code{c-set-offset} line in your top-level @file{.emacs} file, put it
7101 in your @code{c-initialization-hook} (@pxref{CC Hooks}), or simply
7102 modify @code{c-offsets-alist} directly:
7103
7104 @example
7105 (setq c-offsets-alist '((substatement-open . 0)))
7106 @end example
7107
7108 @item
7109 @cindex open paren in column zero
7110 @emph{I have an open paren character at column zero inside a comment or
7111 multiline string literal, and it causes the fontification and/or
7112 indentation to go haywire. What gives?}
7113
7114 It's due to the ad-hoc rule in (X)Emacs that such open parens always
7115 start defuns (which translates to functions, classes, namespaces or any
7116 other top-level block constructs in the @ccmode{} languages).
7117 @ifset XEMACS
7118 @xref{Defuns,,, xemacs, XEmacs User's Manual}, for details.
7119 @end ifset
7120 @ifclear XEMACS
7121 @xref{Left Margin Paren,,, emacs, GNU Emacs Manual}, for details
7122 (@xref{Defuns,,, emacs, GNU Emacs Manual}, in the Emacs 20 manual).
7123 @end ifclear
7124
7125 This heuristic is built into the core syntax analysis routines in
7126 (X)Emacs, so it's not really a @ccmode{} issue. However, in Emacs
7127 21.1 it became possible to turn it off@footnote{Using the variable
7128 @code{open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start}.} and @ccmode{} does so
7129 there since it's got its own system to keep track of blocks.
7130
7131 @end itemize
7132
7133
7134 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7135 @node Updating CC Mode, Mailing Lists and Bug Reports, FAQ, Top
7136 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7137 @appendix Getting the Latest CC Mode Release
7138 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7139
7140 @ccmode{} has been standard with all versions of Emacs since 19.34 and
7141 of XEmacs since 19.16.
7142
7143 @cindex web site
7144 Due to release schedule skew, it is likely that all of these Emacsen
7145 have old versions of @ccmode{} and so should be upgraded. Access to the
7146 @ccmode{} source code, as well as more detailed information on Emacsen
7147 compatibility, etc. are all available on the web site:
7148
7149 @quotation
7150 @uref{http://cc-mode.sourceforge.net/}
7151 @end quotation
7152
7153
7154 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7155 @node Mailing Lists and Bug Reports, GNU Free Documentation License, Updating CC Mode, Top
7156 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7157 @appendix Mailing Lists and Submitting Bug Reports
7158 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7159
7160 @kindex C-c C-b
7161 @findex c-submit-bug-report
7162 @findex submit-bug-report (c-)
7163 To report bugs, use the @kbd{C-c C-b} (bound to
7164 @code{c-submit-bug-report}) command. This provides vital information
7165 we need to reproduce your problem. Make sure you include a concise,
7166 but complete code example. Please try to boil your example down to
7167 just the essential code needed to reproduce the problem, and include
7168 an exact recipe of steps needed to expose the bug. Be especially sure
7169 to include any code that appears @emph{before} your bug example, if
7170 you think it might affect our ability to reproduce it.
7171
7172 Please try to produce the problem in an Emacs instance without any
7173 customizations loaded (i.e., start it with the @samp{-q --no-site-file}
7174 arguments). If it works correctly there, the problem might be caused
7175 by faulty customizations in either your own or your site
7176 configuration. In that case, we'd appreciate it if you isolate the
7177 Emacs Lisp code that triggers the bug and include it in your report.
7178
7179 @cindex bug report mailing list
7180 Bug reports should be sent to @email{bug-cc-mode@@gnu.org}. You can
7181 also send other questions and suggestions (kudos? @t{;-)} to that
7182 address. It's a mailing list which you can join or browse an archive
7183 of; see the web site at @uref{http://cc-mode.sourceforge.net/} for
7184 further details.
7185
7186 @cindex announcement mailing list
7187 If you want to get announcements of new @ccmode{} releases, send the
7188 word @emph{subscribe} in the body of a message to
7189 @email{cc-mode-announce-request@@lists.sourceforge.net}. It's possible
7190 to subscribe from the web site too. Announcements will also be posted
7191 to the Usenet newsgroups @code{gnu.emacs.sources}, @code{comp.emacs},
7192 @code{comp.emacs.xemacs}, @code{comp.lang.c}, @code{comp.lang.c++},
7193 @code{comp.lang.objective-c}, @code{comp.lang.java.softwaretools},
7194 @code{comp.lang.idl}, and @code{comp.lang.awk}.
7195 @c There is no newsgroup for Pike. :-(
7196
7197
7198 @node GNU Free Documentation License, Command and Function Index, Mailing Lists and Bug Reports, Top
7199 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
7200 @include doclicense.texi
7201
7202
7203 @c Removed the tentative node "Mode Initialization" from here, 2005/8/27.
7204 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7205 @node Command and Function Index, Variable Index, GNU Free Documentation License, Top
7206 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7207 @unnumbered Command and Function Index
7208 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7209
7210 Since most @ccmode{} commands are prepended with the string
7211 @samp{c-}, each appears under its @code{c-@var{thing}} name and its
7212 @code{@var{thing} (c-)} name.
7213 @iftex
7214 @sp 2
7215 @end iftex
7216 @printindex fn
7217
7218
7219 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7220 @node Variable Index, Concept and Key Index, Command and Function Index, Top
7221 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7222 @unnumbered Variable Index
7223 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7224
7225 Since most @ccmode{} variables are prepended with the string
7226 @samp{c-}, each appears under its @code{c-@var{thing}} name and its
7227 @code{@var{thing} (c-)} name.
7228 @iftex
7229 @sp 2
7230 @end iftex
7231 @printindex vr
7232
7233
7234 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7235 @node Concept and Key Index, , Variable Index, Top
7236 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7237 @unnumbered Concept and Key Index
7238 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7239
7240 @printindex cp
7241
7242
7243 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7244 @comment Epilogue.
7245 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7246
7247 @bye